Samsung Color Laser Printer Clx 3305fw User Manual

User’s Guide  
CLX-330x/330xW Series  
CLX-330xFN/330xFW Series  
BASIC  
BASIC  
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and  
troubleshooting on windows.  
ADVANCED  
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration, operation and  
troubleshooting on various OS environments.  
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.  
 
Key benefits  
Fast, on-demand printing.  
Environmentally friendly  
-
-
For single-side black and white printing, 18 ppm (A4) or 19 ppm (Letter).  
For single-side color printing, 4 ppm (A4 or Letter).  
Convenience  
To save toner and paper, this machine supports Eco feature (see "Eco  
To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper  
To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (double-sided  
You can print on the go from your smartphone or computer using Google  
To save electricity, this machine automatically conserves electricity by  
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.  
Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you  
captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard (see "Easy Capture  
We recommend using recycled paper for saving energy.  
Samsung Easy Printer Manager and Printing Status is a program that  
monitors and informs you of the machine’s status and allows you to  
customize the machine’s settings (see "Using Samsung Easy Printer  
Fast high resolution printing  
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users compile  
and share large documents or other scanned or faxed information digitally.  
AnyWeb Print helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print the  
screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily, than when you use the  
You can print in a full range of colors using cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.  
You can print with a resolution of up to 2,400 x 600 dpi effective output (600  
x 600 x 2 bit).  
Smart Update allows you to check for the latest software and install the  
latest version during the printer driver installation process. This is available  
only for Windows.  
   
Key benefits  
If you have Internet access, you can get help, support application, machine  
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads.  
Supports various wireless network setting method  
Wide range of functionality and application support  
Using the WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) button  
-
You can easily connect to a wireless network using the WPS button on  
the machine and the access point (a wireless router).  
Supports various paper sizes (see "Print media specifications" on page 121).  
Using the USB cable or a network cable  
Print watermark: You can customize your documents with words, such as  
-
You can connect and set various wireless network settings using a USB  
cable or a network cable.  
Using the Wi-Fi Direct  
Print posters: The text and pictures of each page of your document are  
magnified and printed across the multiple sheets of paper and can then be  
taped together to form a poster (see "Using advanced print features" on  
-
You can conveniently print from your mobile device using the Wi-Fi or  
Wi-Fi Direct feature.  
You can print in various operating systems (see "System requirements" on  
Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and/or a network interface.  
Features by models  
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country.  
Operating System  
CLX-330x Series  
CLX-330xW Series  
CLX-330xFN Series  
CLX-330xFW Series  
Operating System  
Windows  
Mac  
Linux  
(: Included, Blank: Not available)  
   
Features by models  
Software  
You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
For windows, select the printer driver and software in the Select Software to Install window.  
CLX-330x Series  
CLX-330xW Series  
CLX-330xFN Series  
CLX-330xFW Series  
Software  
SPL printer driver  
PCL printer driver  
PS printer driver  
a
XPS printer driver  
Samsung Easy Printer  
Manager  
Scan to PC settings  
Fax to PC settings  
Device Settings  
Samsung Easy Document Creator  
b
Samsung Easy Color Manager  
Samsung Printer Status  
AnyWeb Print  
   
Features by models  
CLX-330x Series  
CLX-330xW Series  
CLX-330xFN Series  
CLX-330xFW Series  
Software  
SyncThru™ Web Service  
(CLX-330xW Series only)  
SyncThru Admin Web Service  
Easy Eco Driver  
(CLX-330xW Series only)  
Fax  
Samsung Network PC Fax  
Twain scan driver  
Scan  
WIA scan driver  
Samsung Scan Assistant  
a. For XPS/PS driver, You can install the XPS/PS printer driver in the Custom Installation window (Refer to Software CD that was provided with your machine).  
(: Included, Blank: Not available)  
Features by models  
Variety feature  
CLX-330x Series  
CLX-330xW Series  
CLX-330xFN Series  
CLX-330xFW Series  
Features  
Hi-Speed USB 2.0  
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 Base TX wired LAN  
(CLX-330xW Series only)  
a
Network Interface 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN  
(CLX-330xW Series only)  
(CLX-330xFW Series only)  
Google Cloud Print™  
Eco printing (Control panel)  
b
Duplex (2-sided) printing (Manual)  
USB memory interface  
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
a. Depending on your country, wireless LAN card may not be available. For some counties, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer  
where you bought your machine.  
b. Windows only.  
(: Included, Blank: Not available)  
 
Features by models  
CLX-330x Series  
CLX-330xW Series  
CLX-330xFN Series  
CLX-330xFW Series  
Features  
Fax  
Multi-send  
Delay send  
Priority send  
Secure receive  
Send/ Receive forward - fax  
Scan to PC  
Scan  
Copy  
ID card copying  
Reduced or enlarged copying  
Collation  
2-up/4-up  
Adjust background  
(: Included, Blank: Not available)  
11  
1. Introduction  
Useful to know  
A paper jam has occurred.  
The machine does not print.  
Open and close the scan unit (see "Front view" on page 21).  
Open the print queue list and remove the document from the  
Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this  
manual and troubleshoot accordingly (see "Clearing paper  
Remove the driver and install it again (see "Installing the driver  
Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows  
Printouts are blurry.  
The toner level might be low or uneven. Shake the toner  
Where can I purchase accessories or supplies?  
Try a different print resolution setting (see "Opening printing  
Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer.  
Visit www.samsung.com/supplies. Select your country/region  
to view product service information.  
Where can I download the machine’s driver?  
The status LED flashes or remains constantly on.  
manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,  
Downloads.  
Turn the product off and on again.  
Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and  
   
About this user’s guide  
2
This user's guide provides information for your basic understanding of the  
machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage.  
General icons  
Read the safety information before using the machine.  
If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting  
chapter.  
Icon  
Text  
Description  
Gives users information to protect the machine from  
possible mechanical damage or malfunction.  
Caution  
Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter.  
All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending  
on its options or model you purchased.  
Provides additional information or detailed  
specification of the machine function and feature.  
Note  
The screenshots in this administrator’s guide may differ from your machine  
depending on the machine’s firmware/driver version.  
The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows 7.  
1
Conventions  
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:  
Document is synonymous with original.  
Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.  
Machine refers to printer or MFP.  
13  
1. Introduction  
       
Safety information  
4
These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and  
others, and to prevent any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read  
and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. After reading  
this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference.  
Operating environment  
Warning  
3
Important safety symbols  
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is  
not grounded.  
Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or  
heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.).  
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe  
personal injury or death.  
Warning  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes  
strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off  
the power switch and unplug the machine.  
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor  
Caution  
personal injury or property damage.  
The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of  
emergencies that might require the user to pull the plug out.  
Do not attempt.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord.  
Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy  
object could result in electric shock or fire.  
Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the  
plug with wet hands.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
14  
1. Introduction  
     
Safety information  
5
Caution  
Operating method  
Caution  
During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation,  
remove the power plug from the electrical outlet.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.  
Burns could occur.  
Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.  
It can cause damage to the machine.  
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears  
damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and  
request assistance from qualified service personnel.  
Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper  
tray.  
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.  
You may get injured.  
If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions  
have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface  
connections and request assistance from qualified service  
personnel.  
Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper.  
New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts.  
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper  
output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch.  
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.  
Burns can occur.  
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not  
attempt to force it in.  
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal  
objects.  
Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could  
result in electric shock.  
It can damage the machine.  
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC  
interface cords.  
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray.  
It can damage the machine.  
This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet.  
15  
1. Introduction  
Safety information  
Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening.  
Caution  
This could result in elevated component temperatures which can  
cause damage or fire.  
Before moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all  
cords. The information below are only suggestions based on the  
units weight.  
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other  
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation  
exposure.  
If you have a medical condition that prevents you from lifting, do  
not lift the machine. Ask for help, and always use the appropriate  
amount of people to lift the device safety.  
This machine's power reception device is the power cord.  
To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the  
electrical outlet.  
Then lift the machine:  
If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09 lbs), lift with 1 person.  
6
If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09 lbs) - 40kg (88.18 lbs), lift  
with 2 people.  
Installation / Moving  
If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18 lbs), lift with 4 or  
more people.  
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.  
Warning  
Choose a flat surface with enough space for ventilation to place  
the machine. Also consider the space required to open the cover  
and trays.  
Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity, or water  
leaks.  
The place should be well-ventilated and be far from direct light,  
heat, and humidity.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
When using the machine for a long period of time or printing a  
large number of pages in a non-ventilated space, it could pollute  
the air and be harmful to your health. Place the machine in a well-  
ventilated space or open a window to circulate the air periodically.  
16  
1. Introduction  
Safety information  
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge  
Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.  
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.  
7
a
Use only No.26 AWG or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary.  
Maintenance / Checking  
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.  
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical  
outlet.  
Caution  
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.  
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe  
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (6  
feet) with a 110V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or  
larger.  
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the  
inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene,  
paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the  
machine.  
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result  
in electric shock or fire.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or  
cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine.  
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight  
location, such as a closet.  
You could get injured.  
If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.  
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.  
Keep cleaning supplies away from children.  
Children could get hurt.  
This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock  
or fire.  
Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself.  
The machine should be connected to  
It can damage the machine. Call a certified technician when the  
machine needs repairing.  
the power level which is specified on the label.  
If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using,  
contact the electrical utility company.  
17  
1. Introduction  
Safety information  
To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide  
provided with the machine.  
Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser  
unit.  
Otherwise, you could damage the machine.  
This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire.  
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean  
from dust or water.  
When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep them away  
from children.  
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.  
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.  
Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with  
screws.  
For supplies that contain toner dust (toner cartridge, waste toner  
bottle, imaging unit, etc.) follow the instructions below.  
Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service  
technician. Repair by non-certified technicians could result in  
fire or electric shock.  
When disposing of the supplies, follow the instructions for  
disposal. Refer to the reseller for disposal instructions.  
Do not wash the supplies.  
The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service  
technician.  
For a waste toner bottle, do not reuse it after emptying the  
bottle.  
If you do not follow the instructions above, it may cause machine  
malfunction and environmental pollution. The warranty does  
not cover damages caused by a user's carelessness.  
8
Supply usage  
Caution  
Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to the  
machine.  
In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a service  
fee will be charged.  
When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash  
it.  
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.  
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.  
Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water.  
18  
1. Introduction  
Safety information  
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,  
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.  
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.  
19  
1. Introduction  
Machine overview  
9
Accessories  
Power cord  
Quick installation guide  
a
b
Software CD  
Misc. accessories  
a. The software CD contains the print drivers, user’s guide, and software applications.  
b. Miscellaneous accessories included with your machine may vary by country of purchase and specific model.  
20  
1. Introduction  
   
Machine overview  
10  
a b  
4
10  
Front door  
Scan unit  
11 USB port  
12 Scanner glass  
Front view  
5
6
Output support  
Control panel  
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model.  
There are various types of machine.  
a. Close the scanner lid before opening the scan unit.  
b. Be careful not to pinch your fingers.  
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  
CLX-330x Series / CLX-330xW Series  
10  
1
7
6
5
11  
12  
4
8
9
3
2
1
2
3
Scanner lid  
Handle  
Tray  
7
8
9
Toner cartridges  
Waste toner container  
Imaging unit  
21  
1. Introduction  
     
Machine overview  
b. Be careful not to pinch your fingers.  
CLX-330xFN Series / CLX-330xFW Series  
1
2
3
4
13  
10  
9
8
7
14  
15  
16  
11  
12  
6
5
1
2
Document feeder cover  
9
Control panel  
Toner cartridge  
Document feeder width  
guide  
10  
3
4
Document feeder input tray  
11 Waste toner container  
Document feeder output  
support  
12  
Imaging unit  
a b  
5
13  
Handle  
Scan unit  
6
7
8
Tray  
14 USB port  
Front cover  
Document output tray  
15 Scanner lid  
16 Scanner glass  
a. Close the scanner lid before opening the scan unit.  
22  
1. Introduction  
Machine overview  
11  
a
2
4
Power receptacle  
Network port  
Rear view  
a. CLX-330xW Series only.  
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model.  
There are various types of machine.  
CLX-330xFN Series / CLX-330xFW Series  
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  
6
5
CLX-330x Series / CLX-330xW Series  
4
3
1
2
4
3
1
2
Rear cover  
5
6
Telephone line socket (LINE)  
Extension telephone socket  
(EXT.)  
Power receptacle  
2
1
3
4
USB port  
Network port  
1
Rear cover  
3
USB port  
23  
1. Introduction  
   
Control panel overview  
This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model. There are various types of control panels.  
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 7).  
12  
CLX-330x Series / CLX-330xW Series  
6
8
4
7
1
2
3
5
10  
9
13  
12  
4
11  
24  
1. Introduction  
   
Control panel overview  
1
Configures the wireless network connection easily without a computer (see "Using the WPS button" on  
a
WPS  
Press this button and the display will Print Screen? on the display screen. If you want to print only the  
active screen, select the Active. If you want to print the whole screen, select Full.  
Print Screen can only be used in the Windows and Mac operating systems.  
You can only use this function with USB-connected machine.  
b
Print Screen  
When printing the active window/whole monitor screen using the print screen button, the  
machine may use more toner depending on what is being printed.  
You can only use this function if the machine’s Samsung Easy Printer Manager program is  
installed. If you are a Mac OS user, you need to enable Screen Print Settings from the  
Samsung Easy Printer Manager to use the Print Screen feature.  
2
Switches between scan and copy mode. The Scan to LED turns on on scan mode and turns off on copy  
mode.  
Scan to  
3
4
5
Display screen  
Arrows  
Shows the current status and displays prompts during an operation.  
Scrolls through the options available in the selected menu and increases or decreases values.  
Opens Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus (see "Menu overview" on page 35).  
Menu  
OK  
6
7
Confirms the selection on the screen.  
Stops an operations at any time.  
Stop/Clear  
25  
1. Introduction  
     
Control panel overview  
8
Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine from the power save mode. If you need to turn the  
machine off, press this button for more than three seconds when the machine is in ready mode.  
Power/  
Wakeup  
9
Starts a job.  
Start  
Back  
10  
Sends you back to the upper menu level.  
11 Status LED  
12  
Turn into eco mode to reduce toner consumption and paper usage when pc-printing and copying only  
Eco  
13  
Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB port on  
the front of your machine.  
Direct USB  
a. CLX-330xW Series only.  
b. CLX-330x Series only.  
26  
1. Introduction  
   
Control panel overview  
13  
CLX-330xFN Series / CLX-330xFW Series  
4
6
7
1
2
3
5
8
9
10 11  
12  
13  
19  
15  
14  
18  
20  
17  
16  
6
a
1
2
Configures the wireless network connection easily without a computer (see "Using the WPS button" on page 166).  
Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy for easier reading, when the original contains faint markings and dark images.  
WPS  
b
Darkness  
ID Copy  
Allows you to copy both sides of an ID card like a driver’s license on a single side of paper (see "ID card copying" on page  
3
4
Display screen  
Copy  
Shows the current status and displays prompts during an operation.  
Switches to Copy mode.  
5
Switches to Fax mode.  
Fax  
27  
1. Introduction  
     
Control panel overview  
6
7
Arrows  
Menu  
OK  
Scrolls through the options available in the selected menu and increases or decreases values.  
Opens Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus (see "Menu overview" on page 35).  
8
9
Confirms the selection on the screen.  
Numeric keypad Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters (see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 215).  
10 Address  
Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers or search for stored fax numbers (see "Setting up the fax address book"  
Book  
11  
12  
Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode, or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number in edit  
Redial/  
Pause  
Stops an operations at any time.  
Stop/  
Clear  
13  
Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine from the power save mode. If you need to turn the machine off, press  
this button for more than three seconds when the machine is in ready mode.  
Power/  
Wakeup  
14  
15  
Starts a job.  
Start  
When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call using speaker  
On Hook  
Dial  
16  
17  
Sends you back to the upper menu level.  
Back  
Scan  
Switches to Scan mode.  
18 Status LED  
Indicates the status of your machine (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 110).  
28  
1. Introduction  
   
Control panel overview  
19  
Turn into eco mode to reduce toner consumption and paper usage when pc-printing and copying only (see "Eco printing"  
Eco  
20  
Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB port on the front of your  
machine.  
Direct USB  
a. CLX-330xFW Series only.  
b. CLX-330xFN Series only.  
29  
1. Introduction  
 
Turning on the machine  
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first.  
1
If you want to turn the power off, press and hold  
button for about 3 seconds.  
(Power/Wakeup)  
Turn the switch on if the machine has a power switch.  
1
2
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending  
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on  
Power is turned on automatically.  
2
For CLX-330x/330xW Series, press  
control panel.  
(Power/Wakeup) button on the  
30  
1. Introduction  
   
Installing the driver locally  
14  
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer  
using the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following  
steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine’s driver (see  
Windows  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
1
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >  
If you are a Mac or Linux operating systems user, refer to the "Installation  
Accessories > Run.  
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD-  
ROM drive and click OK.  
The installation window in this User’s Guide may differ depending on the  
machine and interface in use.  
Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters (118 inches).  
Read and check The software End User License Agreement and Using  
Enhanced Features and Participating in Printer Usage Information  
Collection Program (optional). Then, click Next.  
2
31  
1. Introduction  
   
Installing the driver locally  
Follow the instructions in the installation window.  
3
You can select the software applications in the Select Software to Install  
Window.  
32  
1. Introduction  
Reinstalling the driver  
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to reinstall  
the driver.  
15  
Windows  
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung  
Printers > your printer driver name > Uninstall.  
1
Follow the instructions in the installation window.  
2
Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive and install the driver  
3
33  
1. Introduction  
   
2. Menu Overview and  
Basic Setup  
This chapter provides information about the overall menu structure and the basic setup options.  
 
Menu overview  
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine’s functions.  
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.  
The menus are described in the Advanced Guide (see "Useful Setting Menus" on page 193).  
1
Accessing the menu  
Select the Fax, Copy, or Scan button on the control panel depending on the feature to be used.  
1
Select  
(Menu) until the menu you want appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK.  
2
3
4
5
6
Press the arrows until the needed menu item appears and press OK.  
If the setting item has sub menus, repeat step 3.  
Press OK to save the selection.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to the ready mode.  
35  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
     
Menu overview  
a
Fax Feature  
Fax Setup  
Darkness  
Normal  
Send Forward  
Forward to Fax  
Rcv. Forward  
Sending  
Redial Times  
Change Default  
Resolution  
Darkness  
Original Size  
Auto Report  
On  
Dark+1- Dark+5  
Light+5- Light+1  
Redial Term  
Prefix Dial  
ECM Mode  
Fax Confirm.  
Image TCR  
Forward to Fax  
Forward to PC  
Forward&Print  
Resolution  
Standard  
Fine  
Secure Receive  
Off  
b
Super Fine  
Photo Fax  
Original Size  
Multi Send  
Delay Send  
Priority Send  
Off  
On  
Manual TX/RX  
On  
Dial Mode  
Receiving  
Print  
Off  
Receive Mode  
Ring To Answer  
Stamp RCV Name  
RCV Start Code  
Auto Reduction  
Discard Size  
Add Page  
Cancel Job  
Junk Fax Setup  
DRPD Mode  
a. CLX-330xFN Series/ CLX-330xFW Series only.  
b. This option may not be available depending on your country.  
36  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
   
Menu overview  
Copy Feature  
Copy Setup  
Change Default  
Original Size  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Darkness  
Adjust Bkgd.  
Off  
Original Size  
Copies  
Auto  
Normal  
Enhance Lev.1  
Enhance Lev.2  
Erase Lev.1- Erase Lev.4  
Copy Collation  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Darkness  
Dark+1- Dark+5  
Light+5- Light+1  
Original Type  
Original Type  
Adjust Bkgd.  
Text/Photo  
Photo  
Magazine  
Text  
Layout  
Normal  
2-Up  
4-Up  
ID Copy  
37  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
Menu overview  
Scan Feature  
Scan Setup  
Change Default  
USB Default  
Print Setup  
Screen  
USB Feature  
Original Size  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Enhance  
Original Type  
Resolution  
Color Mode  
File Format  
Darkness  
Landscape  
Copies  
[1 - 999]  
Detailed  
Normal  
Clear Text  
Resolution  
Normal  
Best  
Off  
Minimum  
Normal  
Maximum  
Trapping  
Off  
Auto CR  
Normal  
LF  
Maximum  
LF+CR  
Document Type  
Standard  
Photo  
Emulation  
Emulation Type  
Setup  
Biz Graphic  
CAD  
Web Page  
38  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
Menu overview  
System Setup  
Report  
Configuration  
Machine Setup  
Machine ID  
Paper Setup  
Maintenance  
CLR Empty Msg.  
a
d
Paper Size  
Paper Type  
Margin  
Supplies Info.  
Demo Page  
Supplies Life  
Image Mgr.  
Fax Number  
Date & Time  
Sound/Volume  
Key Sound  
Alarm Sound  
Speaker  
Address Book  
Custom Color  
Tone Adjust.  
Serial Number  
TonerLow Alert  
Clock Mode  
Language  
Fax Confirm.  
Fax Sent  
Power Save  
b
Fax Received  
Auto Power Off  
Wakeup Event  
Ringer  
c
Schedule Jobs  
System Timeout  
Job Timeout  
Altitude Adj.  
Humidity  
Junk Fax  
Network Conf.  
Usage Counter  
Fax Options  
Auto Continue  
Paper Substit.  
PrintBlankPage  
Eco Settings  
a. CLX-330xFN Series/ CLX-330xFW Series only.  
b. CLX-330x Series/CLX-330xW Seriesonly  
c. CLX-330xW Series/ CLX-330xFN Series/ CLX-330xFW Seriesonly.  
d. This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.  
39  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
 
Menu overview  
a
Network  
TCP/IP (IPv4)  
DHCP  
Wireless  
Wi-Fi ON/OFF  
b
BOOTP  
Wi-Fi Direct  
Static  
WPS Setting  
TCP/IP (IPv6)  
c
WLAN Setting  
IPv6 Activate  
DHCPv6 Config  
Ethernet Speed  
WLAN Default  
WLAN Signal  
Clear Setting  
Automatic  
Network Conf.  
Protocol Mgr.  
Net. Activate  
Http Activate  
WINS  
10Mbps Half  
10Mbps Full  
100Mbps Half  
100Mbps Full  
SNMP V1/V2  
UPnP(SSDP)  
MDNS  
SetIP  
SLP  
a. CLX-330xW Series/ CLX-330xFN Series/ CLX-330xFW Series only.  
b. CLX-330xW Series/ CLX-330xFW Series only.  
c. CLX-330xFW Series only.  
40  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
 
Machine’s basic settings  
Select the option you want, then press OK.  
3
You can set the machine’s settings by using the Device Settings in  
Samsung Easy Printer Manager program.  
Language: change the language that is displayed on the control  
panel.  
-
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer  
Manager > (Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings,  
Date & Time: When you set the time and date, they are used in delay  
fax and delay print. They are printed on reports. If, however, they are  
not correct, you need to change it for the correct time being.  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for  
some models.  
Enter the correct time and date using arrows or numeric keypad (see  
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default  
settings.  
Month = 01 to 12  
Day = 01 to 31  
To change the machine’s default settings, follow these steps:  
Year = requires four digits  
Hour = 01 to 12  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some  
Minute = 00 to 59  
models.  
Clock Mode: You can set your machine to display the current time  
using either a 12-hour or 24-hour format.  
Select  
(Menu) button on the control panel.  
1
2
Power Save: When you are not using the machine for a while, use  
this feature to save power.  
Press System Setup > Machine Setup.  
41  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
   
Machine’s basic settings  
When you press the Power/Wakeup button, start printing, or a fax is  
received, the product will wake up from the power saving mode.  
Press  
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Wakeup Event  
> On on the control panel. When you press any button except Power/  
Wakeup button, the machine wake up from the power save mode.  
Altitude Adjust: Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure,  
which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of the  
machine above sea level. Before you set the altitude value,  
determine the altitude where you are (see "Altitude adjustment" on  
Select the option you want, then press OK.  
4
5
6
Press OK to save the selection.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Refer to below links to set other settings useful for using the machine.  
42  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
Media and tray  
2
This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your  
machine.  
Tray overview  
To change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides.  
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause  
problems or require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s  
warranty or service agreements.  
1
2 3  
Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could  
cause damage to the machine.  
Using inflammable print media can cause a fire.  
Use designated print media (see "Print media specifications" on page  
1
2
3
4
Paper cover  
Guide lock  
Paper length guide  
Paper width guide  
4
The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may  
lead to overheating of the unit and, in rare cases may cause a fire.  
If you do not adjust the guide, it may cause paper registration, image skew,  
or jamming of the paper.  
43  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
         
Media and tray  
3
Open the paper cover.  
2
3
Loading paper in the tray  
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending  
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on  
Press and unlatch the guide lock in the tray, pull the tray out manually.  
Then adjust the paper length guide and paper width guide.  
Pull out the paper tray (see "Tray overview" on page 43).  
1
1
3
2
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before  
loading papers.  
4
44  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
   
Media and tray  
Place the paper with the side you want to print facing up.  
5
1
2
For paper smaller than Letter-sized, press and unlatch the guide lock in  
the tray, push the tray in manually. Then adjust the paper length guide  
and paper width guide.  
Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp.  
Do not use a paper with a leading-edge curl, it may cause a paper jam or  
the paper can be wrinkled.  
1
If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper jams.  
2
For paper longer than Legal-sized, press and unlatch the guide lock in  
the tray, pull the tray out manually. Then adjust the paper length guide  
and paper width guide.  
45  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
Media and tray  
Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the paper stack  
without causing it to bend.  
Insert the paper tray.  
6
8
Close the paper cover.  
7
When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the tray (see  
9
The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the  
control panel.  
a To print in application, open an application and start the print menu.  
b Open Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on  
c Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an appropriate  
paper type.  
For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to Label.  
d Select Auto Select (or Manual Feeder) in paper source, then press OK.  
e Start printing in application.  
46  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
Media and tray  
4
a
Types  
Tray  
Printing on special media  
Bond  
Color  
The table below shows the special media usable in tray.  
The media is also shown in the Printing Preferences. To get the highest  
printing quality, select the proper media type from the Printing preferences  
window > Paper tab > Paper Type (see "Opening printing preferences" on page  
CardStock  
Labels  
Preprinted  
Cotton  
For example, if you want to print on labels, select Labels for Paper Type.  
Recycled  
Archive  
When using special media, we recommend you feed one sheet at a time  
Glossy Photo  
Matte Photo  
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine  
depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see  
a. The paper types available manual feeding in tray.  
(: Supported, Blank: Not supported)  
a
Types  
Tray  
Plain  
Thick  
Thin  
47  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
 
Media and tray  
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The  
adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine.  
Labels  
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser  
printers.  
Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled,  
bubbled, or otherwise damaged.  
Card stock/ Custom-sized paper  
When selecting labels, consider the following factors:  
-
Adhesives: Should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature  
about 170°C (338°F).  
In the software application, set the margins to at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches)  
away from the edges of the material.  
-
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them.  
Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing  
serious jams.  
-
-
Curl: Must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.  
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other  
indications of separation.  
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels.  
Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause  
paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine  
components.  
48  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
   
Media and tray  
5
Preprinted paper  
Setting the paper size and type  
When loading preprinted paper, the printed side should be facing up with an  
uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feeding, turn  
the paper around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed.  
After loading paper in the paper tray, set the paper size and type using the  
control panel buttons.  
You can set the machine’s settings by using the Device Settings in  
Samsung Easy Printer Manager program.  
-
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer  
Manager > (Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings,  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for  
some models.  
Must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or  
release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing  
temperature for 0.1 second (about 170°C (338°F)).  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some  
models.  
Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely  
affect machine rollers.  
Select  
(Menu) button on the control panel.  
Before you load preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry.  
During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing  
print quality.  
1
2
3
4
Press System Setup > Paper Setup > Paper Size or Paper Type.  
Select the tray and the option you want.  
Press OK to save the selection.  
49  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
     
Media and tray  
6
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
5
Using the output support  
The settings set from the machine driver override the settings on the  
control panel.  
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number  
of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the surface, and do not  
allow children near it.  
a To print from an application, open an application and start the print  
menu.  
b Open Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on  
c Press the Paper tab and select an appropriate paper.  
The printed pages stack on the output support, and the output support will help  
the printed pages to align. The printer sends output to the output tray by  
default.  
If you want to use special-sized paper such as billing paper, select the  
Paper tab > Size > Edit... and set Custom Paper Size Settings in the  
50  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
 
Media and tray  
Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents with other  
unusual characteristics.  
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending  
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on  
8
Loading originals  
7
You can use the scanner glass or the document feeder to load an original for  
copying, scanning, and sending a fax.  
Preparing originals  
Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or larger than  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).  
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending  
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on  
Do not attempt to load the following s of paper, in order to prevent paper  
jam, low print quality and machine damage.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper  
Coated paper  
On the scanner glass  
Onion skin or thin paper  
Wrinkled or creased paper  
Curled or rolled paper  
Torn paper  
Using the scanner glass, you can copy or scan originals. You can get the best  
scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images. Make sure that no  
originals are in the document feeder. If an original is detected in the document  
feeder, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass.  
Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.  
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry  
before loading.  
Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.  
51  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
       
Media and tray  
Lift and open the scanner lid.  
Place the original face down on the scanner glass. Align it with the  
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.  
1
2
Close the scanner lid.  
3
52  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
Media and tray  
Load the original face up into the document feeder input tray. Make sure  
that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on  
the document input tray.  
2
Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and  
toner consumption.  
Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout. Always  
If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner lid  
until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid. If the  
book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the scanner  
lid open.  
Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt.  
Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid. The scanner lid may fall  
on your hands and get hurt.  
Do not look the light from inside of the scanner while copying or  
scanning. It is harmful to eyes.  
In the document feeder  
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before  
loading originals.  
1
53  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
Media and tray  
Adjust the document feeder width guides to the paper size.  
3
Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the printout.  
54  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
Basic printing  
Select your machine from the Select Printer list.  
3
For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Using  
9
Printing  
If you are a Mac or Linux operating systems user, refer to the Advanced  
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7.  
Open the document you want to print.  
1
Select Print from the File menu.  
2
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range  
are selected within the Print window.  
4
5
To take advantage of the advanced printing features, click Properties or  
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.  
55  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
     
Basic printing  
10  
Canceling a print job  
If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as  
follows:  
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon  
) in the Windows task bar.  
(
You can also cancel the current job by pressing  
control panel.  
(Stop/Clear) on the  
56  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
 
Basic printing  
11  
Click Properties or Preferences.  
4
Opening printing preferences  
The Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may  
differ depending on the machine in use.  
When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a  
warning mark  
option but it is not recommended, and an  
select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment.  
or . An  
mark means you can select that certain  
mark means you cannot  
Open the document you want to print.  
1
2
3
Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears.  
Select your machine from the Select Printer.  
You can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing (see  
You can check the machine’s current status pressing the Printer Status  
57  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
   
Basic printing  
Using a favorite setting  
To use a saved setting, select it in the Favorites tab. The machine is now set  
to print according to the settings you have selected.  
The Favorites option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for the  
Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for future use.  
To delete saved settings, select it in the Favorites tab and click Delete.  
To save a Favorites item, follow these steps:  
12  
Change the settings as needed on each tab.  
1
Using help  
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.  
2
Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and  
press F1 on your keyboard.  
Click Save.  
3
Enter name and description, and then select the desired icon.  
4
Click OK. When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are saved.  
5
58  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
     
Basic printing  
13  
Select  
the control panel.  
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Eco Settings on  
1
2
Eco printing  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
The Eco function cuts toner consumption and paper usage. The Eco function  
allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco-friendly printing.  
Default Mode: Select this to turn on or off the eco mode.  
-
-
Off: Set the eco mode off.  
If you press the Eco button from the control panel, eco mode is enabled. The  
default setting of Eco mode is Multiple Pages per Side (2) and Toner Save.  
On: Set the eco mode on.  
If you set the eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru™ Web  
Service (Settings tab > Machine Settings > System > Eco > Settings) or  
Samsung Easy Printer Manager (Device Settings > Eco), the On force  
message appears. You have to enter the password to change the eco mode  
status.  
Setting Eco mode on the control panel  
You can set the machine’s settings by using the Device Settings in  
Samsung Easy Printer Manager program.  
-
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer  
Manager > (Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings,  
Select Temp.: Follow the settings from Syncthru™ Web Service or  
Samsung Easy Printer Manager. Before you select this item, you  
must set the eco function in SyncThru™ Web Service (Settings tab >  
Machine Settings > System > Eco > Settings) or Samsung Easy  
Printer Manager (Device Settings > Eco).  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for  
some models.  
-
-
Default Eco: The machine is set to Default Eco mode.  
The settings set from the machine’s driver override the settings on the  
control panel.  
Custom Eco: Change any necessary values.  
Press OK to save the selection.  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for  
some models.  
3
59  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
   
Basic printing  
The actual amount displayed is only an estimate as the actual amount may  
differ depending on the operating system used, computing performance,  
application software, connection method, media type [thickness], media  
size, job complexity, etc.  
Setting eco mode on the driver  
Open the Eco tab to set Eco mode. When you see the eco image (  
means the eco mode is currently enabled.  
), that  
Eco options  
Printer Default: Follows the settings from the machine's control panel.  
None: Disables Eco mode.  
Eco Printing: Enables eco mode. Activate the various Eco items you want to  
use.  
Password: If the administrator fixed to enable the Eco mode, you have to  
enter the password to change the status.  
Result simulator  
Result Simulator shows the results of reduced emission of carbon dioxide, used  
electricity, and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you  
selected.  
The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed  
paper is one hundred without a blank page when the Eco mode is disabled.  
Refers to the calculation coefficient about CO2, energy, and paper from IEA,  
the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communication of Japan and  
www.remanufacturing.org.uk. Each model has a different index.  
The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average printing  
power consumption of this machine.  
60  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
Basic copying  
For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Copy" on  
If you need to cancel the copying job during the operation, press  
(Stop/  
Clear) and the copying will stop.  
14  
15  
Basic copy  
Changing the settings for each copy  
CLX-330x Series/CLX-330xW Series: Make sure that the Scan to button’s  
LED is off.  
1
Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly and  
easily make a copy.  
CLX-330xFN Series/CLX-330xFW Series: Select  
panel.  
(copy) on the control  
If you press the  
(Stop/Clear) button twice while setting the copy  
options, all of the options you have set for the current copy job will be  
canceled and returned to their default status. Or, they will automatically  
return to their default status after the machine completes the copy in  
progress.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
2
3
If you want to customize the copy settings including Reduce/Enlarge,  
Darkness, Contrast, Original Type, and more by using the control  
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for  
some models.  
Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number keypad, if  
necessary.  
4
5
Press  
(Start).  
Darkness  
If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images, you can adjust  
the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read.  
61  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
           
Basic copying  
CLX-330x Series/CLX-330xW Series: Make sure that the Scan to button’s  
LED is off.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
1
4
CLX-330xFN Series/CLX-330xFW Series: Select  
panel.  
(copy) on the control  
Original  
The original setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the  
document for the current copy job.  
Select  
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Darkness on the control panel.  
2
3
Select the option you want and press OK.  
CLX-330x Series/CLX-330xW Series: Make sure that the Scan to button’s  
1
LED is off.  
For example, the Light+5 being the lightest, and the Dark+5 being the  
darkest.  
CLX-330xFN Series/CLX-330xFW Series: Select  
panel.  
(copy) on the control  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
4
Select  
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Original Type on the control panel.  
2
3
Darkness  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
The Darkness menu lets you increase or decrease the difference between the  
bright and dark areas of an image.  
Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.  
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.  
CLX-330x Series/CLX-330xW Series: Make sure that the Scan to button’s  
LED is off.  
1
If texts in the printout is blurry, select Text to get the clear texts.  
CLX-330xFN Series/CLX-330xFW Series: Select  
panel.  
(copy) on the control  
Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.  
Magazine: Use when the originals are magazine.  
Select  
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Darkness on the control panel.  
2
3
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
4
Select the option you want and press OK.  
62  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
 
Basic copying  
To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate  
Reduced or enlarged copy  
CLX-330x Series/CLX-330xW Series: Make sure that the Scan to button’s  
LED is off.  
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25% to 400% from the  
document feeder or scanner glass.  
1
CLX-330xFN Series/CLX-330xFW Series: Select  
panel.  
(copy) on the control  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
Select  
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge > Custom on the  
If the machine set to Eco mode, reduce and enlarge features are not  
available.  
2
control panel.  
Enter the copy size you want using the numeric keypad.  
3
4
5
To select from the predefined copy sizes  
Press OK to save the selection.  
CLX-330x Series/CLX-330xW Series: Make sure that the Scan to button’s  
LED is off.  
1
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
CLX-330xFN Series/CLX-330xFW Series: Select  
panel.  
(copy) on the control  
When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of  
your copy.  
Select  
panel.  
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge on the control  
2
16  
ID card copying  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
Press (Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
3
4
Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet.  
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and  
the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original. This  
feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item such as business card.  
63  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
     
Basic copying  
Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows  
indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.  
5
6
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.  
If the machine set to Eco mode, this feature is not available.  
Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.  
Press ID Copy on the control panel.  
1
Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass  
where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.  
2
Press  
(Start) button.  
Place Front Side and Press [Start] appears on the display.  
3
If you do not press the  
copied.  
(Start) button, only the front side will be  
Press  
(Start).  
4
Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Back Side  
If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be  
printed.  
and Press [Start].  
64  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
Basic scanning  
For special scanning features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Scan  
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection, or select  
Enable Scan from Device Panel in Samsung Easy Printer Manager >  
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PCSettings.  
17  
Basic Scanning  
Select the scan destination you want and press OK.  
3
Default setting is My Documents.  
This is the normal and usual procedure for scanning originals.  
This is a basic scanning method for USB-connected machine.  
You can create and save the frequently used settings as a profile list. Also  
you can add and delete the profile and save each profile to a different  
path.  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for  
some models.  
To change the Samsung Easy Printer Manager >  
Switch to  
If you want to scan using the network, refer to the Advanced Guide (see  
advanced mode > Scan to PCSettings.  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
4
5
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
1
2
Scanning begins.  
Scanned image is saved in computer’s C:\Users\users name\My  
Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating  
system or the application you are using.  
CLX-330xFN Series/CLX-330xFW Series: Select  
(scan) > Scan to PC >  
Local PC on the control panel.  
OR  
CLX-330x Series/CLX-330xW Series: Press Scan to > Scan to PC > Local  
PC on the control panel.  
65  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
     
Basic faxing  
18  
For special faxing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Fax  
Preparing to fax  
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord to  
Installation Guide how to make a connection. The method of making a  
telephone connection is different from one country to another.  
You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone. For more  
information ask your internet service provider.  
We recommend using traditional analog phone services (PSTN: Public  
Switched Telephone Network) when connecting telephone lines to use  
a fax machine. If you use other Internet services (DSL, ISDN, VolP), you can  
improve the connection quality by using the Micro-filter. The Micro-filter  
eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or  
Internet quality. Since the DSL Micro-filter is not provided with the  
machine, contact your Internet service provider for use on DSL Micro-  
filter.  
19  
Sending a fax  
When you place the originals, you can use either the document feeder or  
the scanner glass. If the originals are placed on both the document feeder  
and the scanner glass, the machine will read the originals on the document  
feeder first, which has higher priority in scanning.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on  
1
1
2
3
Line port  
Micro filter  
DSL modem / Telephone line  
Select  
(fax) on the control panel.  
2
3
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see  
66  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
     
Basic faxing  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on  
4
1
Press  
(Start) on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and  
5
send the fax to the destinations.  
Select  
(fax) on the control panel.  
2
3
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see  
If you want to send a fax directly from your computer, use Samsung  
Press  
(On Hook Dial) on the control panel or lift the handset.  
When you want to cancel a fax job, press  
machine starts transmission.  
(Stop/Clear) before the  
4
5
6
Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.  
If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message asking to  
place another page.  
Press  
(Start) on the control panel when you hear a high-pitched fax  
signal from the remote fax machine.  
Sending a fax manually  
Sending a fax to multiple destinations  
Perform the following to send a fax using  
panel.  
(On Hook Dial) on the control  
You can use the multiple send feature, which allows you to send a fax to multiple  
locations. Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to a remote  
station. After transmission, the originals are automatically erased from memory.  
If your machine is a handset model, you can send a fax using the handset  
You cannot send faxes with this feature if you chosen super fine as an option  
or if the fax is in color.  
67  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
 
Basic faxing  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
When you have finished entering fax numbers, select No at the Another  
No.? prompt and press OK.  
1
8
The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the  
order in which you entered them.  
Select  
(fax) on the control panel.  
2
3
Multi send report is printed after sending faxes.  
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see  
20  
Receiving a fax  
Select  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Multi Send on the control panel.  
4
5
Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK.  
Your machine is preset Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax, the  
machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically  
receives the fax.  
You can press speed dial numbers or select a group dial number using  
the  
(Address book) button.  
21  
Enter the second fax number and press OK.  
6
7
Adjusting the document settings  
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.  
Before starting a fax, change the following settings according to your original’s  
status to get the best quality.  
To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat  
steps 5 and 6.  
You can add up to 10 destinations.  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some  
models.  
Once you have entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another  
group dial number.  
68  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
   
Basic faxing  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Resolution  
3
The default document settings produce good results when using typical text-  
based originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor quality, or  
contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality  
fax.  
Darkness  
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.  
Select  
panel.  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Resolution on the control  
1
2
The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the default  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
Select  
panel.  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Darkness on the control  
Standard: Originals with normal sized characters.  
1
Fine: Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals  
printed using a dot-matrix printer.  
Select a darkness level you want.  
Press (Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
2
3
Super Fine: Originals containing extremely fine detail. Super Fine  
mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are  
communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution.  
For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available. The  
resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.  
When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax machine  
with which you are communicating does not support Super Fine  
resolution, the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode  
supported by the other fax machine.  
Photo Fax: Originals containing shades of gray or photographs.  
69  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
   
Using USB memory device  
23  
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.  
Plugging in a USB memory device  
22  
Lift the scanner lid slightly and insert your USB memory device into the USB  
memory port. Close the scanner lid again before using the device.  
About USB memory  
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give  
you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded music and  
videos, high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or  
move.  
You can do the following tasks on your machine by using a USB memory device.  
Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device  
Print data stored on a USB memory device  
Restore backup files to the machine’s memory  
Format the USB memory device  
Check the available memory space  
The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USB V1.1 and  
USB V2.0 memory devices. Your machine supports USB memory devices with  
FAT16/FAT32 and a sector size of 512 bytes.  
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.  
70  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
   
Using USB memory device  
24  
You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug connector.  
Scanning to a USB memory device  
A
B
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for  
some models.  
Use only a metal-shielded USB memory device.  
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory  
device.  
Only use a USB memory device that has obtained compatibility certification;  
otherwise, the machine might not recognize it.  
Scanning  
Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation  
or writing to or reading from USB memory. The machine warranty does  
not cover damage caused by user’s misuse.  
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.  
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on  
2
If your USB memory device has certain features such as security settings  
and password settings, your machine may not automatically detect it.  
For details about these features, see the user’s guide of the USB memory  
device.  
Select  
(scan) > Scan To USB > OK on the control panel.  
3
The machine begins scanning.  
To scan multiple pages, select Yes while Another Page? Yes/No appears. After  
scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device from the  
machine.  
71  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
 
Using USB memory device  
25  
Customizing Scan to USB  
Printing from a USB memory device  
You can specify image size, file format, or color mode for each scanning to USB  
job.  
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device.  
File s supported by Direct Print option.  
Select  
control panel.  
(scan) >  
(Menu) > Scan Feature > USB Feature on the  
1
2
PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are  
compatible.  
Select the setting option you want appears.  
Original Size: Sets the image size.  
If you print PRN files created from other machine, the printout would be  
different.  
Original Type: Sets the original document’s .  
Resolution: Sets the image resolution.  
TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline  
JPEG: JPEG Baseline  
Color Mode: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in this option,  
you cannot select JPEG in File Format.  
File Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. If  
you select JPEG in this option, you cannot select Mono in Color  
Mode.  
PDF: PDF 1.7 or lower version  
To print a document from a USB memory device  
Darkness: Sets the brightness level to scan an original.  
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,  
and then press Direct USB.  
Select the desired status you want and press OK.  
1
3
4
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other setting options.  
Select USB Print.  
2
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
You can change the default scan settings. Refer to the Advanced Guide.  
72  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
 
Using USB memory device  
Select the folder or file you want and press OK.  
3
After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device, files cannot be  
restored. Therefore, confirm that you no longer need the data before  
deleting it.  
If you see [+] or [D] in the front of a folder name, there are one or more  
files or folders in the selected folder.  
Select the number of copies to be printed or enter the number.  
4
Press OK, Start or Print to start printing the selected file.  
5
Deleting an image file  
After printing the file, the display asks if you want to print another job.  
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,  
and then press Direct USB.  
1
Press OK when Yes appears to print another job, and repeat from step 2.  
6
Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to select No and press OK.  
Select File Manage > Delete and press OK.  
2
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
7
Select the file you want to delete and press OK.  
3
26  
Select Yes.  
4
Managing USB memory  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
5
You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or all at  
once by reformatting the device.  
Formatting a USB memory device  
If you see [+] or [D] in the front of a folder name, there are one or more files  
or folders in the selected folder.  
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,  
and then press Direct USB.  
1
Select File Manage > Format and press OK.  
2
Select Yes.  
3
73  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
 
Using USB memory device  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
4
Viewing the USB memory status  
You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and saving  
documents.  
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,  
and then press Direct USB.  
1
Select Check Space .  
2
The available memory space appears on the display.  
3
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
4
74  
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup  
Ordering supplies and accessories  
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies, and maintenance parts.  
To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories, and maintenance parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine.  
You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies, and then select your country/region to obtain the contact information for service.  
76  
3. Maintenance  
   
Available supplies  
When supplies reach the end of their life spans, you can order the followings of supplies for your machine:  
a
Type  
Part name  
Average yield  
Toner cartridge  
Average continuous black cartridge yield: Approx. 1,500 standard pages (Black)  
K406 (CLT-K406S): Black  
C406 (CLT-C406S): Cyan  
M406 (CLT-M406S): Magenta  
Y406 (CLT-Y406S): Yellow  
Average continuous color cartridge yield: Approx. 1,000 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/Cyan)  
b
Imaging unit  
CLT-R406  
CLT-W406  
Approx. 16,000 images  
Waste toner container  
Approx. 7,000 images  
a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, graphics, media type and media size.  
b. Image counts based on one color on each page. If you print documents in full color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black), the life of this item will be reduced by 25%.  
Depending on the options, percentage of image area and job mode used, the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ.  
When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies, these must be purchased in the same country as the machine you are using. Otherwise, new toner  
cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the specific  
country conditions.  
Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured toner. Samsung cannot guarantee non-genuine  
Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine’s  
warranty.  
77  
3. Maintenance  
     
Available maintenance parts  
To purchase maintenance parts, contact the source where you bought the machine. Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service  
provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. The warranty does not cover the replacement of any maintenance parts once it has reached its  
“Average yield”.  
Maintenance parts are replaced at specific intervals to avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts, see table below. The purpose of which  
is to maintain your machine in top working condition. The maintenance parts below should be replaced when the life span of each item has been met.  
a
Parts  
Average yield  
Approx. 20,000 black pages or 5,000 color pages  
Approx. 20,000 pages  
Fuser unit  
Transfer roller  
Feed roller  
Approx. 20,000 pages  
Pickup roller  
Approx. 20,000 pages  
Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)  
Approx. 20,000 pages for black and white mode or 5,000 pages for color mode  
Approx. 20,000 pages  
b
ADF Feed roller  
Approx. 20,000 pages  
ADF Rubber Pad  
a. It will be affected by the operating system used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, media type, media size and job  
complexity.  
b. CLX-330xFN Series/ CLX-330xFW Series only  
78  
3. Maintenance  
     
Storing the toner cartridge  
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature  
and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow these recommendations to  
-
An environment with salty air.  
1
ensure optimal performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new  
Samsung toner cartridge.  
Handling instructions  
Store this cartridge in the same environment in which the printer will be used.  
This should be in controlled temperature and humidity conditions. The toner  
cartridge should remain in its original and unopened package until installation  
– if original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge  
with paper and store in a dark cabinet.  
Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.  
2
Toner cartridge usage  
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf  
and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed  
from the printer, follow the instructions below to store the toner cartridge  
properly.  
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-Samsung  
brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or  
remanufactured toner cartridges.  
Store the cartridge inside the protective bag from the original package.  
Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if it  
were installed in the machine.  
Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused  
by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung brand toner  
cartridges.  
Do not store consumables in any of the following conditions:  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).  
Humidity range less than 20% or greater than 80%.  
An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.  
Direct sunlight or room light.  
Dusty places.  
A car for a long period of time.  
An environment where corrosive gases are present.  
79  
3. Maintenance  
       
Storing the toner cartridge  
3
Estimated cartridge life  
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the  
amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print yield may vary  
depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating  
environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, media type and/or  
media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the  
toner is higher and you may need to change the cartridge more often.  
80  
3. Maintenance  
 
Redistributing toner  
When opening a scan unit, hold the document feeder and scan unit  
together.  
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:  
White streaks or light printing occurs and/or density variation side to side.  
Printing even after the toner empty status can cause serious damage to  
your machine.  
The Status LED blinks red. The toner-related message saying that the toner  
is low may appear on the display.  
The computers’s Samsung Printing Status program window appears on the  
computer telling you which color cartridge is low on toner (see "Using  
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the  
remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing  
will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner.  
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending  
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on  
Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner  
cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash  
clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
81  
3. Maintenance  
   
Redistributing toner  
82  
3. Maintenance  
Replacing the toner cartridge  
Shake the toner cartridge thoroughly, it will increase the initial print quality.  
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).  
Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
When opening a scan unit, hold the document feeder and scan unit together.  
Printing even after the toner empty status can cause serious damage to your machine.  
When a toner cartridge has reached the end of life, the Printing Status window appears on the computer, indicating the toner cartridge needs to be placed.  
83  
3. Maintenance  
   
Replacing the toner cartridge  
84  
3. Maintenance  
Replacing the waste toner container  
When the life span of the waste toner container has expired, waste toner container-related message appears on the screen display of the control panel, indicating  
the waste toner container needs to be replaced. Check the waste toner container for your machine (see "Available supplies" on page 77). For information about  
installing the waste toner container, refer to the waste toner container installation guide included on the package.  
Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it does not mean the machine is damaged. Contact a service representative when print quality problems  
occur.  
When you pull out the waste toner container out of the machine, move the container carefully not to drop it from your hands.  
Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat surface so that the toner does not spill.  
Do not tilt or turn over the container.  
85  
3. Maintenance  
   
Replacing the waste toner container  
86  
3. Maintenance  
Replacing the imaging unit  
When the life span of the imaging unit has expired, the Printing Status window appears on the computer, indicating the imaging unit needs to be placed. Otherwise,  
your machine stops printing.  
Don’t use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the imaging unit package. You could damage the surface of the imaging unit.  
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit.  
To prevent damage, do not expose the imaging unit to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper to protect it if necessary.  
Before closing the front cover, make sure all toner cartridges are installed properly.  
87  
3. Maintenance  
 
Replacing the imaging unit  
88  
3. Maintenance  
Monitoring the supplies life  
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the number of pages the machine has printed or scanned. Replace the corresponding parts, if  
necessary.  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.  
Select  
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > Supplies Life on the control panel.  
1
2
Select the option you want and press OK.  
Total: Displays the total number of pages printed.  
ADF Scan: Displays the number of pages printed by using the document feeder.  
Platen Scan: Displays the number of pages scanned by using scanner glass.  
Supplies Info.: Prints the supply information page.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
3
89  
3. Maintenance  
   
Setting the toner low alert  
If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low, a message or LED informing the user to change the toner cartridge appears. You can set the option for whether or not  
this message or LED appears.  
You can set the machine’s settings by using the Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer Manager program.  
-
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager >  
(Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings, see "Device Settings" on  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.  
Select  
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > TonerLow Alert on the control panel.  
1
2
3
Select the option you want.  
Press OK to save the selection.  
90  
3. Maintenance  
   
Cleaning the machine  
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep it in the best printing  
condition and use your machine longer.  
Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvents, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the  
cabinet.  
If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum  
cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you.  
4
Cleaning the outside  
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine.  
91  
3. Maintenance  
     
Cleaning the machine  
5
Cleaning the inside  
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as toner specks  
or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems.  
To prevent damage to the imaging unit, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.  
Do not touch the green area of the imaging unit. Use the handle on the imaging unit to avoid touching this area.  
Use a dry lint free cloth when cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents such  
as benzene or thinner. Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine.  
Use a dry lint-free cloth to clean the machine.  
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before  
cleaning the machine.  
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).  
When opening a scan unit, hold the document feeder and scan unit together.  
92  
3. Maintenance  
 
Cleaning the machine  
1
2
1
2
93  
3. Maintenance  
Cleaning the machine  
6
Cleaning the scan unit  
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed.  
Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before  
cleaning the machine.  
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).  
Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.  
Lift and open the scanner lid.  
1
2
94  
3. Maintenance  
   
Cleaning the machine  
Wipe the surface of the scanner until it is clean and dry.  
3
1
3
2
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
White bar  
Document feeder glass  
White sheet  
Scanner lid  
Scanner glass  
Close the scanner lid.  
4
95  
3. Maintenance  
Tips for moving & storing your machine  
When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to  
the machine or reduce print quality.  
When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely.  
96  
3. Maintenance  
   
4. Troubleshooting  
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.  
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. If your machine  
has a display screen, check the message on the display screen first to solve the error.  
If you cannot find a solution to your problem in this chapter, refer to the Troubleshooting  
chapter in the Advanced Guide (see "Troubleshooting" on page 271).  
If you cannot find a solution in the User's Guide or the problem persists, call for service.  
 
Tips for avoiding paper jams  
By selecting the correct media s, most paper jams can be avoided. To avoid paper jams, refer to the following guidelines:  
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (see "Tray overview" on page 43).  
Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.  
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.  
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.  
Do not mix papers in a tray.  
98  
4. Troubleshooting  
   
Clearing original document jams  
When an original document jams in the document feeder, a warning message appears on the display.  
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document slowly and carefully.  
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin or mixed paper- originals.  
99  
4. Troubleshooting  
   
Clearing original document jams  
1
Original paper jam in front of scanner  
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).  
This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10).  
100  
4. Troubleshooting  
Clearing original document jams  
2
Original paper jam inside of scanner  
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).  
This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10).  
101  
4. Troubleshooting  
Clearing original document jams  
102  
4. Troubleshooting  
Clearing original document jams  
3
Original paper jam in exit area of scanner  
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).  
This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Front view" on page 21).  
Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder.  
Gently remove the jammed paper from the document feeder.  
1
2
103  
4. Troubleshooting  
Clearing paper jams  
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently.  
4
In tray  
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).  
104  
4. Troubleshooting  
     
Clearing paper jams  
105  
4. Troubleshooting  
Clearing paper jams  
5
Inside the machine  
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.  
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).  
106  
4. Troubleshooting  
 
Clearing paper jams  
6
In exit area  
107  
4. Troubleshooting  
 
Clearing paper jams  
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.  
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 21).  
108  
4. Troubleshooting  
Clearing paper jams  
109  
4. Troubleshooting  
Understanding the status LED  
The color of the LED indicates the machine's current status.  
Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country (see "Control panel overview" on page 24).  
To resolve the error, look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part (see "Understanding display messages" on page 112).  
You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers’s Samsung Printing Status window (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 265).  
If the problem persists, call a service representative.  
LED  
Status  
Off  
Description  
The machine is off-line.  
When the backlight blinks, the machine is receiving or printing data.  
Blinking  
Green  
On  
The machine is on-line and can be used.  
A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the display  
message. When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes.  
a
Blinking  
Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. The estimated cartridge life of toner is close. Prepare a  
new cartridge for replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the  
b
Status  
Red  
A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life . It is recommended to replace the  
The cover is opened. Close the cover.  
On  
There is no paper in the tray when receiving or printing data. Load paper in the tray.  
The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message (see "Understanding display  
A paper jam has occurred (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 104).  
110  
4. Troubleshooting  
     
Understanding the status LED  
LED  
Status  
Blinking  
Description  
The machine is connecting to a wireless network.  
Blue  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
The machine is connected to a wireless network (see "Wireless network setup" on page 164).  
The machine is disconnected from a wireless network.  
Wireless  
The machine is in power save mode.  
Blue  
Power/Wakeup (  
Eco  
)
The machine is in ready mode or machine’s power is off.  
Eco mode is on.  
The default setting of Eco mode is 2-up and toner save.  
Green  
Off  
On  
Eco mode is off.  
Eco mode is on.  
The default setting of Eco mode is 2-up and toner save.  
Scan to  
Green  
Off  
Eco mode is off.  
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19798. The number  
of pages may be affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, graphics, media and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even  
when red LED is on and the printer stops printing.  
b. Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country (see "Control panel overview" on page 24).  
111  
4. Troubleshooting  
Understanding display messages  
7
Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine’s status  
or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages’ and their  
meaning, and correct the problem, if necessary.  
Paper Jam-related messages  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
This function is not supported for the devices which has a control panel  
display. You can resolve the error with the guideline from the  
computers’s Printing Status window (see "Using Samsung Printer Status"  
Document jam.  
Remove jam  
The loaded original  
document has jammed in  
the document feeder.  
Clear the jam (see "Clearing  
If a message is not in the table, reboot the power and try the printing job  
again. If the problem persists, call a service representative.  
Jam or empty  
Paper has jammed in the  
paper feed area.  
Clear the jam (see "In tray"  
Door open&close  
When you call for service, provide the service representative with the  
contents of display message.  
There is no paper in tray.  
Load paper in tray (see  
Some messages may not appear on the display depending on the  
options or models.  
Paper Jam  
Paper has jammed in the  
inside machine.  
[error number] indicates the error number.  
[tray type] indicates the tray number.  
[media type] indicates the media type.  
[media size] indicates the media size.  
[color] indicates the color of toner.  
inside machine  
Paper Jam in [tray Paper has jammed in the  
type]  
Clear the jam (see "Clearing  
paper tray.  
Paper Jam  
in exit area  
Paper has jammed in the exit Clear the jam (see "In exit  
area.  
Paper Empty in  
[tray type]  
There is no paper in tray.  
Load paper in tray (see  
112  
4. Troubleshooting  
   
Understanding display messages  
8
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Toner-related messages  
Replace toner  
The indicated toner cartridge  
has almost reached its  
You can choose Stop or  
Continue as shown on  
the control panel. If you  
select Stop, the printer  
stops printing and you  
cannot print any more  
without changing the  
cartridge. If you select  
Continue, the printer  
keeps printing but the  
printing quality cannot  
beguaranteed.Besides,  
it can cause serious  
damage to your  
Replace new  
cartridge  
a
estimated cartridge life.  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Install Toner  
A toner cartridge is not  
installed.  
Install a toner cartridge.  
Install toner  
cartridge  
Not Compatible The toner cartridge is not  
Install the corresponding  
toner cartridge with  
aSamsung-genuine  
cartridge.  
suitable for your machine.  
[color] toner  
Not Compatible  
toner cartridge  
Not original  
[color] toner  
The toner cartridge is not a  
Samsung-genuine toner  
cartridge.  
Install the corresponding  
toner cartridge with a  
Samsung-genuine  
cartridge.  
machine.  
Replace the toner  
cartridge for the best  
print quality when this  
message appears.  
Using a cartridge  
beyond this stage can  
result in printing  
quality issues (see  
Prepare toner  
Small amount of toner is left in Prepare a new cartridge  
the indicated cartridge. The  
estimated cartridge life of  
toner is close.  
for a replacement. You  
may temporarily increase  
the printing quality by  
redistributing the toner  
Prepare new  
cartridge  
The indicated toner cartridge Replace the toner  
has reached its estimated  
cartridge life. The machine  
might stop printing.  
113  
4. Troubleshooting  
Understanding display messages  
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates  
the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752 (see "Available  
supplies" on page 77). The number of pages may be affected by operating environment,  
percentage of image area, printing interval, media, percentage of image area, and media size.  
Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when replace new cartridge appears  
and the machine stops printing.  
Samsung does not recommend using a non-genuine Samsung toner  
cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot guarantee a  
non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required  
as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be  
covered under the machine warranty.  
114  
4. Troubleshooting  
Understanding display messages  
9
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Tray-related messages  
BOOTP problem:  
Auto IP Run  
There is a problem with the  
network.  
Change the Auto IP.  
DHCP problem:  
Auto IP Run  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Jam or empty  
Paper has jammed in the  
paper feed area.  
Clear the jam (see "In  
BOOTP problem:  
Reconfigure  
DHCP  
The IP address assignment is Change the IP address  
failed. This happens, when assignment method to  
Auto IP for BOOTP/DHCP is DHCP/BOOTP or Static. If  
set in SyncThru™ Web  
Service.  
Door open&close  
There is no paper in tray.  
Load paper in tray (see  
you do not change this  
option, the BOOTP/DHCP  
server continually asks to  
assign the IP Address.  
DHCP problem:  
Reconfigure  
DHCP  
10  
Network-related messages  
Fail to authenticate.  
Check the network  
authentication protocol.  
If the problem persists,  
contact your network  
administrator.  
802.1x  
Network Error  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Network Problem:  
IP Conflict  
The network IP address you Check the IP address and  
have set is being used by  
someone else.  
reset it if necessary (see  
"Printing a network  
11  
Misc. messages  
Wireless  
Wireless module is not  
installed.  
Reboot the power and try  
the printing job again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for service.  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Network Error  
Adjusting Color  
Registration  
The machine is adjusting the Wait a few minutes.  
color registration.  
115  
4. Troubleshooting  
Understanding display messages  
Message  
Calibrating  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
The machine is calibrating  
the image density.  
Wait a few minutes.  
Scanner Locked  
The scanner is locked.  
Reboot the power. If the  
problem persists, please  
call for service.  
image density…  
Door Open  
Close it  
The cover is not securely  
latched.  
Close the cover until it  
locks into place.  
Install TR.  
belt unit.  
The transfer belt is not  
installed.  
Install a Samsung-  
genuine transfer belt.  
Scan Unit Open  
or Exit JAM  
The scan unit is not securely  
latched or paper has  
jammed in the scanner area.  
Clear the jam (see  
"Clearing original  
Not compatible  
transfer belt  
The transfer belt of the  
machine is not for your  
machine.  
Install the a Samsung-  
genuine part designed  
for your machine.  
Close the cover until it  
locks into place.  
Not installed  
Waste tank  
The waste toner container is Install a Samsung-  
not installed.  
genuine waste toner  
container.  
Door of scanner is  
open.  
The cover of scanner is not  
securely latched.  
Close the cover until it  
locks into place.  
Check Fax Line  
The fax line is not perperly  
Connect the fax line to  
connected to the LINE port. the LINE port not to the  
Error [error number]  
The indicated toner  
cartridge is installed  
improperly, ortheconnector two or three times to  
Reinstall the Samsung-  
genuine toner cartridge  
Install [color] toner  
is polluted.  
confirm it is seated  
Not proper room  
temp. Move set  
The machine is in a room  
with improper room  
temperature.  
Move the machine to a  
room with proper room  
temperature.  
properly. Or clean the  
connector. If the problem  
persists, contact the  
service representatives.  
Output bin Full  
Remove paper  
The output tray is full. Or the Remove papers from the  
sensor is not facing down.  
output tray, the machine  
resumes printing. Or  
make sure the sensor is  
facing down. If the  
problem persists, call for  
service.  
Error [error number] The machine unit cannot be Reboot the power and try  
controlled.  
the printing job again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for service.  
Turn off then on  
Error [error number]  
Call for service  
116  
4. Troubleshooting  
Understanding display messages  
Message  
Prepare new  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
The life of the transfer belt  
will expired soon.  
Replace the transfer belt  
with a new one. Contact  
the service  
Replace/Install  
Waste Toner Tank  
The life span of the waste  
toner container has expired container with a  
and the printer will stop  
printing until a new waste  
toner container is placed  
into the printer.  
Replace a waste toner  
Transfer belt  
Samsung-genuine waste  
toner container.  
representatives.  
Replace new  
Transfer belt  
The life of the transfer belt  
has expired.  
Replace the transfer belt  
with a new one. Contact  
the service  
Prepare new  
Imaging unit  
The life of the imaging unit Replace the imagingunit  
will be expired soon.  
representatives.  
with a new one. Contact  
the service  
representatives.  
Transfer Belt Error  
The transfer belt cannot be Reboot the power and try  
controlled.  
Replace with  
The life of the imaging unit  
will be expired.  
the printing job again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for service.  
new imaging unit  
Install  
The imaging unit is not  
installed  
imaging unit  
Prepare new  
The life of the transfer belt  
will expired soon.  
Replace the transfer belt  
with a new one. Contact  
the service  
Transfer roller  
Error [error number]  
The imaging unit is installed Reinstall the imaging unit  
improperly, or the cover is  
not securely latched.  
to confirm it is seated  
properly. Close the cover  
until it locks into place.  
Door open/close  
representatives.  
Replace new  
The life of the transfer belt  
has expired.  
Replace the transfer belt  
with a new one. Contact  
the service  
Transfer roller  
representatives.  
Replace  
The life of the fuser unit will Replace the fuser unit  
be expired soon.  
with a new one. Contact  
the service  
Fuser Soon  
Replace new  
Fuser unit  
The life of the fuser unit will  
be expired.  
representatives.  
117  
4. Troubleshooting  
5. Appendix  
This chapter provides product specifications and information concerning applicable regulations.  
 
Specifications  
1
General specifications  
The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice. See www.samsung.com for possible changes in information.  
Items  
Description  
406 x 362 x 288.6 mm (16 x 14.3 x 11.4 inches)  
Dimension  
Weight  
Width x Length x Height  
CLX-330x Series  
CLX-330xW Series  
CLX-330xFN Series  
406 x 362 x 333.5 mm (16 x 14.3 x 13.1 inches)  
12.80 Kg (28.22 lbs)  
CLX-330xFW Series  
CLX-330x Series  
Machine with consumables  
CLX-330xW Series  
CLX-330xFN Series  
13.96 Kg (30.78 lbs)  
CLX-330xFW Series  
background noise level  
Color printing  
a
Ready mode  
Print mode  
Noise Level  
Less than 46 dB (A)  
Less than 48 dB (A)  
Less than 52 dB (A)  
Less than 53 dB (A)  
Less than 51 dB (A)  
Less than 51 dB (A)  
Black and white printing  
Scanner glass  
Copy mode  
Scan mode  
Document feeder  
Scanner glass  
Document feeder  
Temperature  
Operation  
10 to 32°C (50 to 89.6°F)  
0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F)  
Storage (packed)  
119  
5. Appendix  
   
Specifications  
Items  
Description  
Humidity  
Operation  
20 to 80% RH  
10 to 90% RH  
Storage (packed)  
b
110 volt models  
220 volt models  
AC 110 - 127 V  
AC 220 - 240 V  
Power rating  
Power consumption  
Average operating mode  
Ready mode  
Less than 290 W  
Less than 60 W  
c
CLX-330x Series: Less than 1.2 W  
Power save mode  
CLX-330xW Series: Less than 1.7 W (Wi-Fi Direct on: Less than 2.3 W)  
CLX-330xFN Series: Less than 1.6 W  
CLX-330xFW Series: Less than 2.1 W (Wi-Fi Direct on: Less than 2.7 W)  
d
Less than 0.45 W  
SPW-B4319S  
Power off mode  
e
Module  
Wireless  
a. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: basic machine installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.  
b. See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage (V), frequency (hertz) and of current (A) for your machine.  
c. The power consumption of power save mode may be affected by machine's status, setting conditions, operating environment.  
d. Power consumption can be completely avoided only when the power cable is not connected.  
e. Wireless models only (see "Features by models" on page 7).  
120  
5. Appendix  
Specifications  
2
Print media specifications  
a
Print media weight/Capacity  
Type  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray  
2
Letter  
Legal  
US Folio  
A4  
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)  
210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches)  
216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)  
182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches)  
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)  
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)  
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches)  
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches)  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
60 to 85 g/m (16 to 23 lbs bond)  
2
150 sheets of 75 g/m (20 lbs bond)  
Oficio  
JIS B5  
ISO B5  
Plain paper  
Executive  
A5  
A6  
2
86 to 120 g/m (23 to 32 lbs bond)  
Refer to the Plain  
paper section  
Thick paper  
Thin paper  
5 sheets  
2
Refer to the Plain paper section  
60 to 70 g/m (16 to 19 lbs bond)  
Refer to the Plain  
paper section  
2
150 sheets of 60 g/m (16 lbs bond)  
121  
5. Appendix  
   
Specifications  
a
Print media weight/Capacity  
Type  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray  
2
Refer to the Plain paper section  
75 to 90 g/m (20 to 24 lbs bond)  
Refer to the Plain  
paper section  
Cotton  
2
150 sheets of 75 g/m (20 lbs bond)  
2
Colored,  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
60 to 85 g/m (16 to 24 lbs bond)  
Refer to the Plain  
paper section  
Pre-printed,  
Recycled  
2
150 sheets of 75 g/m (20 lbs bond)  
2
Letter, Legal, Oficio, Refer to the Plain paper section  
120 to 150 g/m (32 to 40 lbs bond)  
US Folio, A4, JIS B5,  
ISO B5, Executive,  
A5  
b
5 sheets  
Labels  
2
Letter, Legal, Oficio, Refer to the Plain paper section  
121 to 163 g/m (32 to 43 lbs bond)  
5 sheets  
US Folio, A4, JIS B5,  
ISO B5, Executive,  
A5,  
Card stock  
Postcard 4x6  
2
Refer to the Plain paper section  
105 to 120 g/m (28 to 32 lbs bond)  
10 sheets  
Refer to the Plain  
paper section  
Bond paper  
Archive  
2
Refer to the Plain paper section  
70 to 90 g/m (18.6 to 24 lbs bond)  
100 sheets  
Refer to the Plain  
paper section  
2
Refer to the Plain paper section  
Glossy Photo,  
Matte Photo  
Letter, A4,  
111 to 220 g/m (30 to 58 lbs bond)  
1 sheets  
Postcard 4x6  
122  
5. Appendix  
Specifications  
a
Print media weight/Capacity  
Type  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray  
2
Minimum size (custom)  
Maximum size (custom)  
76 x 152 mm (3 x 6 inches)  
60 to 120 g/m (16 to 32 lbs bond)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
a. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.  
b. The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 (sheffield). This means the numeric level of smoothness.  
2
If media weight is over 120 g/m (32 lbs bond), load a paper into the tray one by one.  
3
System requirements  
Microsoft® Windows®  
Requirement (recommended)  
Operating system  
CPU  
Intel Pentium III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)  
RAM  
free HDD space  
1.5 GB  
®
®
®
128 MB (256 MB)  
128 MB (512 MB)  
512 MB (2 GB)  
Windows XP  
®
®
®
1.25 GB to 2 GB  
10 GB  
Windows Server 2003  
Intel Pentium III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)  
®
®
®
Windows Server 2008  
Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz)  
123  
5. Appendix  
   
Specifications  
Requirement (recommended)  
Operating system  
CPU  
RAM  
512 MB (1 GB)  
1 GB (2 GB)  
free HDD space  
15 GB  
®
®
®
Windows Vista  
Intel Pentium IV 3 GHz  
®
®
®
16 GB  
Windows 7  
Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher  
®
Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).  
DVD-R/W Drive  
®
®
®
512 MB (2 GB)  
10 GB  
Windows Server 2008 R2  
Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster)  
Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems.  
Users who have administrator rights can install the software.  
Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine.  
Mac  
Requirements (Recommended)  
RAM  
Operating system  
CPU  
Free HDD space  
®
Mac OS X 10.4  
128 MB for a powerPC based Mac (512 MB)  
512 MB for an Intel-based Mac (1 GB)  
1 GB  
Intel processors  
PowerPC G4/G5  
124  
5. Appendix  
 
Specifications  
Requirements (Recommended)  
Operating system  
CPU  
RAM  
Free HDD space  
®
Mac OS X 10.5  
512 MB (1 GB)  
1 GB  
Intel processors  
867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/G5  
®
Mac OS X 10.6  
1 GB (2 GB)  
2 GB  
1 GB  
4 GB  
Intel processors  
®
Mac OS X 10.7 - 10.8  
Intel processors  
Linux  
Items  
Requirements  
®
Operating system  
Redhat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit)  
Fedora 5 ~ 13 (32/64 bit)  
SuSE Linux 10.1 (32 bit)  
®
OpenSuSE 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 (32/64 bit)  
Mandriva 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1, 2010 (32/64 bit)  
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10, 9.04, 9.10, 10.04 (32/64 bit)  
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64 bit)  
Debian 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit)  
CPU  
Pentium IV 2.4GHz (Intel Core™2)  
RAM  
512 MB (1 GB)  
125  
5. Appendix  
 
Specifications  
Items  
Requirements  
Free HDD space  
1 GB (2 GB)  
126  
5. Appendix  
Specifications  
4
Network environment  
Network and wireless models only (see "Features by models" on page 7).  
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. The following table shows the network environments supported by the  
machine.  
Items  
Specifications  
Network interface  
Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX Wired Lan  
802.11b/g/n Wireless LAN  
®
®
®
®
®
Network operating system  
Network protocols  
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista , Windows 7, Windows Server 2008 R2  
Various Linux OS  
Mac OS X 10.4 -10.8  
TCP/IPv4  
DHCP, BOOTP  
DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP  
Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP, WSD  
SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP  
TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP)  
Wireless security  
Authentication: Open System, Shared Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal (PSK)  
Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES  
127  
5. Appendix  
 
Regulatory information  
This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with  
several regulatory statements.  
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be  
followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:  
5
Laser safety statement  
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21  
CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is  
certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-  
1 : 2007.  
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and  
printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above  
a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service  
condition.  
Warning  
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from  
laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage  
your eyes.  
128  
5. Appendix  
   
Regulatory information  
6
8
Ozone safety  
Power saver  
This product’s ozone emission rate is under 0.1 ppm. Because  
ozone is heavier than air, keep the product in a place with good  
ventilation.  
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that  
reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.  
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of  
time, power consumption is automatically lowered.  
7
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.  
Mercury Safety  
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://  
For ENERGY STAR certified models, the ENRGY STAR label will be on  
your machine. Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR certified.  
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal  
Laws.(U.S.A. only)  
9
Recycling  
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an  
environmentally responsible manner.  
129  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
10  
11  
Correct disposal of this product (Waste electrical &  
electronic equipment)  
China only  
(Applicable in countries with separate collection  
systems)  
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the  
product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable)  
should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of  
their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or  
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these  
items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the  
sustainable reuse of material resources.  
Household users should contact either the retailer where they  
purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of  
where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe  
recycling.  
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and  
conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic  
accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for  
disposal.  
2000m  
Dan hab yungh youq gij digih haijbaz 2000 m doxroengz haenx ancienz sawjyungh.  
130  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
14  
(The United States of America only)  
Radio frequency emissions  
Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest  
recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or  
call, (877) 278 - 0799  
FCC information to the user  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions:  
12  
State of California Proposition 65 Warning (US Only)  
This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
This device must accept any interference received, including interference  
that may cause undesired operation.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class  
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed  
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may  
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this  
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,  
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is  
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
13  
Taiwan only  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is connected.  
131  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
15  
Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.  
United States of America  
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer  
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the  
equipment.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15  
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication  
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in  
your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present.  
Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices.  
Canadian radio interference regulations  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise  
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing  
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and  
Science Canada.  
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the  
United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label.  
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques  
applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le  
matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et  
Sciences Canada.  
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the  
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not  
include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches)  
from the body when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless  
device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the  
RF exposure limits as set by the FCC.  
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any  
other antenna or transmitter.  
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
132  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
16  
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way.  
Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it.  
Contact manufacturer for service.  
Russia only  
FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:  
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination  
the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be exceeded at  
distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain  
a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This device  
cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna.  
17  
Germany only  
133  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
18  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number  
of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of  
an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the  
requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five. / L’indice  
d’equivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de  
terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique. La  
terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de  
dispositifs, a la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’equivalence de la  
sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excede pas cinq.  
Turkey only  
19  
21  
Thai only  
Fax Branding  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any  
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a  
telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin  
at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the  
transmission the following information:  
20  
Canada only  
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. / Le  
present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables  
d’Industrie Canada.  
1
2
the date and time of transmission  
identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the  
message; and  
3
telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity  
or individual.  
134  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities,  
equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required  
in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and  
regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render  
any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company  
communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of such terminal  
equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer  
shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity  
to maintain uninterrupted service  
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements  
adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains,  
among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.  
If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.  
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not  
expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to  
operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm  
to the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the  
customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is  
impractical, the company may temporarily cease service, providing that  
they:  
22  
Ringer Equivalence Number  
a promptly notify the customer.  
b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine  
may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine. In some  
instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.  
c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal  
Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC  
Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed  
on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have  
“overloaded” the line. Installing several s of equipment on the same telephone  
line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls, especially  
ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of  
the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure  
proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may  
not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating  
properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may  
cause harm to the telephone network.  
You should also know that:  
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.  
If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone  
line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception  
problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other  
equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your  
machine.  
135  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we  
recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the  
telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or  
telephone and electronic specialty stores.  
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should be suitable.  
However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug  
sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded  
plug.  
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to  
emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the  
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give  
you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number.  
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.  
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you  
plug it into a socket.  
This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.  
This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.  
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of  
a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.  
Important warning:  
You must earth this machine.  
23  
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:  
Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)  
Green and Yellow: Earth  
Blue: Neutral  
Brown: Live  
Important  
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do  
the following:  
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug  
and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit  
the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost  
the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover.  
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E”  
or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.  
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or  
colored black.  
Contact the people from you purchased the machine.  
136  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L”  
or colored red.  
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and  
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their  
conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced  
standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.  
representative.  
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.  
24  
Declaration of conformity (European countries)  
EC Certification  
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal  
Equipment Directive (FAX)  
Approvals and Certifications  
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European  
single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network  
(PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed  
to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European  
countries:  
Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [CLX-330x Series] is in  
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant  
provisions of Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC), EMC Directive (2004/  
108/EC).  
Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [CLX-330xFN Series/  
CLX-330xW Series/CLX-330xFW Series] is in compliance with the  
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R&TTE  
Directive 1999/5/EC.  
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung  
Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.  
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application  
of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the European  
Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document  
(EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure  
network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed  
against, and is fully compliant with, all of the relevant advisory notes contained  
in this document.  
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at  
www.samsung.com, go to Support > Download center and enter  
your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC.  
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of  
the member states related to low voltage equipment.  
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC, approximation of the laws of  
the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.  
137  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
No limitations at this time  
European radio approval information (for products  
fitted with EU-approved radio devices)  
25  
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless  
communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be present  
(embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This  
section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label  
to verify the presence of wireless devices.  
Israel only  
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for  
use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with a  
Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the  
system label.  
26  
Regulatory compliance statements  
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in  
you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European  
Commission through the R&TTE directive.  
Wireless guidance  
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication  
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in  
your printer system. The following section is a general overview of  
considerations while operating a wireless device.  
European states qualified under wireless approvals:  
EU countries  
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in  
the specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in  
your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio  
Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the  
wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for  
requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be  
allowed.  
European states with restrictions on use:  
EU  
In France, this equipment may only be used indoors.  
EEA/EFTA countries  
138  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in  
your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because  
the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less  
energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and  
recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use.  
Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact  
during normal operation.  
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or  
services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless  
device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and  
Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples  
where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in  
environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless  
devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or  
turning on the wireless device.  
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless  
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not  
include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8  
inches) from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting.  
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices.  
Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling  
between countries with your system, check with the local Radio  
Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on  
the use of a wireless device in the destination country.  
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any  
other antenna or transmitter.  
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless  
device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields  
are in place and the system is fully assembled.  
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of  
common restrictions are listed below:  
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any  
way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to  
use it. Contact manufacturer for service.  
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with  
equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations  
require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane.  
IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth  
communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless  
communication.  
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be  
used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact  
manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.  
139  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
27  
China only  
140  
5. Appendix  
Copyright  
© 2012 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.  
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.  
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.  
Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
Microsoft, Internet Explorer, Excel, Word, PowerPoint, and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and other countries.  
Google, Picasa, Google Docs, Android and Gmail are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.  
Google Cloud Print is a trademark of Google Inc.  
iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S and other countries.  
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.  
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.  
Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.  
REV. 1.03  
141  
5. Appendix  
   
User’s Guide  
CLX-330x/330xW Series  
CLX-330xFN/330xFW Series  
ADVANCED  
ADVANCED  
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration,  
operation and troubleshooting on various OS environments.  
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.  
BASIC  
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and troubleshooting  
on windows.  
 
1. Software Installation  
This chapter provides instructions for installing essential and helpful software for use in an environment where the  
machine is connected via a cable. A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using  
the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network  
If you are a Windows OS user, refer to the Basic Guide for installing the machine’s driver (see  
Only use a USB cable no longer then 3 meter (118 inches).  
 
Installation for Mac  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.  
1
14  
15  
For Mac OS X 10.5 -10.8, open the Applications folder > System  
Preferences and click Print & Fax.  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
2
Click Add on the Printer List.  
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.  
3
For Mac OS X 10.5 -10.8, click the “+” folder icon; a display window  
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.  
will pop up.  
4
Click Continue.  
Click Default Browser and find the USB connection.  
5
16  
17  
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.8, click Default and find the USB connection.  
Read the license agreement and click Continue.  
6
For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung  
in Print Using and your machine name in Model.  
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.  
7
When the message that warns that all applications will close on your  
computer appears, click Continue.  
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.8, if Auto Select does not work properly, select  
8
Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using.  
Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default  
machine.  
Click Continue on the User Options Pane.  
9
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be  
installed.  
10  
Click Add.  
18  
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.  
To install the fax driver:  
Enter the password and click OK.  
a Open the Applications folder > Samsung > Fax Queue Creator.  
b Your machine appears on the Printer List  
c Select machine to use and click Create button  
11  
Installing software requires you to restart your computer. Click Continue  
Installation.  
12  
After the installation is finished, click Quit or Restart.  
13  
146  
1. Software Installation  
   
Reinstallation for Mac  
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
2
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.  
3
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Uninstaller OS X icon.  
4
Enter the password and click OK.  
5
When the uninstall is done, click OK.  
6
If a machine has already been added, delete it from the Print Setup Utility  
or Print & Fax.  
147  
1. Software Installation  
   
Installation for Linux  
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to  
Support or Downloads).  
The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon  
and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience. If you  
have any difficulties, consult the on-screen help that is available through your  
system menu or from the driver package Windows applications, such as Unified  
Driver Configurator or Image Manager.  
1
Installing the Unified Linux Driver  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root” in the  
Login field and enter the system password.  
2
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you  
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.  
From the Samsung website, download the Unified Linux Driver package  
to your computer.  
3
Right-click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package.  
4
Double click cdroot > autorun.  
5
When the welcome screen appears, click Next.  
6
When the installation is complete, click Finish.  
7
148  
1. Software Installation  
   
Reinstallation for Linux  
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root” in the  
Login field and enter the system password.  
2
You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer driver. If you  
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.  
Open the Terminal program. When the Terminal screen appears, type in  
the following.  
3
[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/  
[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh  
Click Next.  
4
Click Finish.  
5
149  
1. Software Installation  
   
2. Using a Network-  
Connected Machine  
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up a network connected machine and software.  
Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model (see "Features by  
 
Useful network programs  
2
There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in a  
network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing  
several machines on the network is possible.  
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service  
Web-based machine management solution for network administrators.  
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing  
network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network  
machines from any site with corporate internet access.  
Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.  
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  
1
3
SyncThru™ Web Service  
SetIP wired network setup  
The web server embedded on your network machine allows you to do the  
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually  
configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.  
Check the supplies information and status.  
Customize machine settings.  
Set the email notification option. When you set this option, the machine  
status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain  
person's email automatically.  
The machine that does not support the network port, it will not be able  
to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 23).  
Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to  
various network environments.  
TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.  
151  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
Wired network setup  
4
First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements.  
In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP  
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network.  
Printing a network configuration report  
You can print Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel  
that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set  
up a network.  
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows)  
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from Control  
Panel > Security Center > Windows Firewall.  
Press the  
(Menu) button on the control panel and select Network >  
Network Conf. (Network Configuration).  
Install this program from the supplied CD-ROM by double-click  
Application > SetIP > Setup.exe.  
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine’s MAC  
address and IP address.  
1
For example:  
Follow the instructions in the installation window.  
2
MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78  
IP Address: 169.254.192.192  
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.  
3
Turn on the machine.  
4
5
From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung  
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.  
5
Setting IP address  
Click the  
IP configuration window.  
icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/  
6
The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be  
able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 23).  
TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.  
152  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
               
Wired network setup  
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as  
follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information  
assigned by a network manager before proceeding.  
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Mac)  
7
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System  
Preferences > Security > Firewall.  
The following instructions may vary from your model.  
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.  
1
Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select  
MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPapplet.html.  
2
Double-click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select  
Trust. The browser will open the SetIPapplet.html page that shows the  
3
printer’s name and IP address information.  
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report  
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes  
0015992951A8.  
Click the  
icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/  
4
5
IP configuration window.  
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In  
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by  
a network manager before proceeding.  
Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the  
Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are  
8
correct.  
153  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
Wired network setup  
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report  
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes  
0015992951A8.  
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report  
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes  
0015992951A8.  
Select Apply, then OK, and OK again.  
The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration  
Report.  
6
5
Quit Safari.  
7
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Linux)  
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System  
Preferences or Administrator.  
The following instructions may vary from your model or operating systems.  
Open /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/.  
1
Double-click the SetIPApplet.html file.  
2
Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.  
3
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In  
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by  
a network manager before proceeding.  
4
154  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
Installing driver over the network  
Read and check The software End User License Agreement and Using  
Enhanced Features and Participating in Printer Usage Information  
Collection Program (optional). Then, click Next.  
3
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  
The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be  
able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 23).  
You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the  
software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
For windows, select the printer driver and software in the Select  
Software to Install window.  
6
Windows  
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered  
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP  
1
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
Select Network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen.  
4
5
If the Connect Device window appears, check that the machine is  
connected to your network. Then, click Next.  
The firewall software might be blocking network communication. Before  
connecting the device to the network, disable the computer’s firewall.  
155  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
     
Installing driver over the network  
The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you  
wish to use and click OK.  
6
Command- line  
Definition  
Description  
/p”<port name>” or Specifies printer port.  
/P”<port name>”  
Printer port name can be  
specified as IP address,  
hostname, USB local port  
name or IEEE1284 port name.  
Follow the instructions in the installation window.  
7
Network Port will be  
created by use of  
Standard TCP/IP  
Port monitor. For  
local port, this port  
must exist on  
system before  
being specified by  
command.  
Silent installation Mode  
For example:  
/p”xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” in  
where, “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”  
means IP address for  
network printer. /  
Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user  
intervention. Once you start the installation, the machine driver and software  
are automatically installed on you computer. You can start the silent installation  
by typing /s or /S in the command window.  
p”USB001”, /P”LPT1:”, /  
p”hostname”  
Command-line Parameters  
/a”<dest_path>” or Specifies destination path  
Since machine drivers should  
be installed on the OS specific  
location, this command  
applies to only application  
software.  
Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window.  
for installation.  
/A”<dest_path>”  
Following command-line are effective and operated when command is  
used with /s or /S. But /h, /H or /? are exceptional commands that can be  
operated solely.  
The destination  
path should be a  
fully qualified path.  
Command- line  
/s or  
/S  
Definition  
Description  
/n”<Printer name>” Specifies printer name.  
With this parameter, you can  
add printer instances as your  
or  
Printer instance shall be  
Starts silent installation.  
Installs machine drivers  
without prompting any UIs or  
user intervention.  
created as specified printer wishes.  
name.  
/N”<Printer name>”  
156  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Installing driver over the network  
Command- line  
/nd or  
Definition  
Description  
Command- line  
/d or  
/D  
Definition  
Description  
Commands not to set the  
installed driver as a default driver will not be the default  
machine driver.  
It indicates installed machine  
Uninstalls all device drivers This command will remove all  
and applications from your installed device drivers and  
/ND  
machine driver on your  
system if there are one or  
more printer drivers installed.  
If there is no installed  
machine driver on your  
system, then this option  
won’t be applied because  
Windows OS will set installed  
printer driver as a default  
machine driver.  
system.  
application software from  
your system.  
/v”<share name>” or Shares installed machine  
It will install all supported  
Windows OS platform’s  
and add other available  
platform drivers for Point & machine drivers to system  
/V”<share name>”  
Print.  
and share it with specified  
<share name> for point and  
print.  
/o or  
/O  
Opens Printers and Faxes This command will open  
folder after installation.  
Printers and Faxes folder  
after the silent installation.  
/x or  
/X  
Uses existing machine  
driver files to create printer way to install a printer  
instance if it is already  
installed.  
This command provides a  
instance that uses installed  
printer driver files without  
installing an additional driver.  
/h, /H or /?  
Shows Command-line Usage.  
/up”<printer  
name>” or  
Removes only specified  
printer instance and not the way to remove only specified  
driver files.  
This command provides a  
7
Mac  
printer instance from your  
system without effecting  
other printer drivers. It will  
not remove printer driver files  
from your system.  
/UP”<printer  
name>”  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered  
on.  
1
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
2
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.  
157  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
 
Installing driver over the network  
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.  
Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.  
4
5
6
7
8
14  
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.8, open the Applications folder > System  
Click Continue.  
Preferences and click Print & Fax.  
Read the license agreement and click Continue.  
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.  
Click Add on the Printer List.  
15  
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.8, click the “+” icon. A display window will pop  
up.  
When the message which warns that all applications will close on your  
computer appears, click Continue.  
For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer.  
16  
17  
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.8, click IP.  
Click Continue on the User Options Pane.  
9
Select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol.  
If you have not set the IP address yet, click Set IP address and refer to "IPv4  
configuration using SetIP (Mac)" on page 153. If you want to set the wireless  
When printing a document containing many pages, printing performance  
may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option.  
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be  
installed.  
10  
Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address input field.  
18  
19  
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.  
Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot determine  
the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue  
first.  
Enter the password and click OK.  
11  
12  
Installing software requires you to restart your computer. Click Continue  
Installation.  
After the installation is finished, click Quit or Restart.  
13  
158  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Installing driver over the network  
For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung  
in Print Using and your machine name in Model.  
Install the Linux driver and add network printer  
20  
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.8, if Auto Select does not work properly, choose  
Select Printer Software and your machine name in Print Using.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered  
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.  
1
Click Add.  
Download the Unified Linux Driver package from the Samsung website.  
Extract the UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz file and open the new directory.  
Double-click the cdroot > autorun  
21  
2
3
Your machine appears in the Printer List, and is set as the default  
machine.  
4
To install the fax driver:  
The Samsung installer window opens. Click Next.  
The add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.  
Select network printer and click Search button.  
The machine’s IP address and model name appears on list field.  
Select your machine and click Next.  
5
a Open the Applications folder > Samsung > Fax Queue Creator.  
b Your machine appears on the Printer List.  
c Select machine to use and Click Create button.  
6
7
8
8
Linux  
9
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to  
Support or Downloads).  
Input the printer description and Next.  
10  
11  
12  
After the machine is added, click Finish.  
When installation is done, click Finish.  
159  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
 
Installing driver over the network  
Add a network printer  
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator.  
1
Click Add Printer.  
2
The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.  
3
Select Network printer and click the Search button.  
4
The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.  
5
Select your machine and click Next.  
6
Enter the printer description and click Next.  
7
After the machine is added, click Finish.  
8
160  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
IPv6 configuration  
9
IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher.  
From the control panel  
Activating IPv6  
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  
Press the  
(Menu) button on the control panel.  
1
2
3
4
If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting  
to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting.  
Press Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > IPv6 Activate.  
Select On and press OK.  
The machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and  
managements.  
Turn the machine off and turn it on again.  
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address starts with  
FE80).  
When you install the printer driver, do not configure both IPv4 and  
IPv6. We recommend to configure either IPv4 or IPv6 (see "Installing  
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network  
router.  
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.  
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.  
DHCPv6 address configuration  
In the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6  
address.  
If you have a DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set one of the following  
options for default dynamic host configuration.  
Press the  
(Menu) button on the control panel.  
1
2
Press Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > DHCPv6 Config.  
161  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
IPv6 configuration  
Press OK to select the required value you want.  
Check the IPv6 Protocol check box to activate IPv6.  
Click the Apply button.  
3
5
6
7
DHCPv6 Addr.: Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.  
DHCPv6 Off: Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.  
Router: Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router.  
Turn the machine off and turn it on again.  
You can also set the DHCPv6.  
10  
To manually set the IPv6 address:  
From the SyncThru™ Web Service  
Check the Manual Address check box. Then, the Address/Prefix text  
box is activated. Enter the rest of the address  
(e.g.,:3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the hexadecimal 0 through 9, A  
through F).  
Activating IPv6  
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter  
the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and  
press the Enter key or click Go.  
1
2
IPv6 address configuration  
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to  
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and password.  
We recommend you to change the default password for security  
reasons.  
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, that supports IPv6  
addressing as a URL.  
1
Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless  
2
Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network  
ID: admin  
Password: sec00000  
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address  
starts with FE80).  
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, move the mouse  
cursor over the Settings of the top menu bar and then click Network  
Settings.  
3
4
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a  
network router.  
Click TCP/IPv6 on the left pane of the website.  
162  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
IPv6 configuration  
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.  
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.  
Enter the IPv6 addresses (e.g.,: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]).  
Address must be enclosed in '[ ]' brackets.  
3
163  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
Wireless network name and network password  
Make sure your machine supports wireless networking. Wireless  
networking may not be available depending on the model (see "Features  
Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first set up,  
a network name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network Password are  
created for the network. Ask your network administrator about this information  
before proceeding with the machine installation.  
If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network settings  
to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting.  
11  
Getting started  
Understanding your network type  
Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and the  
machine at a time.  
Infrastructure mode  
This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs  
(Small Office/ Home Office). This mode uses an access point to  
communicate with the wireless machine.  
Ad hoc mode  
This mode does not use an access point. The wireless  
computer and wireless machine communicate directly.  
164  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
         
Wireless network setup  
12  
Introducing wireless set up methods  
You can set wireless settings either from the machine or the computer. Choose the setting method from the below table.  
Some wireless network installation types may not be available depending on the model or country.  
Set up method  
With Access Point  
Connecting method  
From th computer  
Description & Reference  
A
B
C
D
From th machine’s control panel  
E
F
Without Access Point  
From th computer  
Wi-Fi Direct setup  
G
H
If problems occur during wireless set up or driver installation, refer to the troubleshooting chapter (see "Troubleshooting" on page 183).  
It is strongly recommended that you set the password on Access Points. If you do not set the password on Access Points, they might be exposed to illegal access  
from unknown machines including PCs, smart phones and printers. Refer to the Access Point user' guide for password settings.  
165  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
 
Wireless network setup  
13  
Choosing your type  
Using the WPS button  
There are two methods available to connect your machine to a wireless network  
If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected  
Setup™ (WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network settings by  
using the  
The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect your  
machine to a wireless network by pressing both the (WPS) button on the  
(WPS) button on the control panel.  
pressing the  
(WPS) button on the control panel without a computer.  
control panel of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button on a Wi-Fi Protected  
Setup™ WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router) respectively.  
If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode,  
make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine.  
Using the WPS (PBC) button or entering the PIN from the computer to  
connect to the access point (or wireless router) varies depending on the  
access point (or wireless router) you are using. Refer to the user's guide  
of the access point (or wireless router) you are using.  
The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect your  
machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a Wi-  
Fi Protected Setup™ WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router).  
Factory default in your machine is PBC mode, which is recommended for a  
typical wireless network environment.  
When using the WPS button to set the wireless network, security settings  
may change. To prevent this, lock the WPS option for the current wireless  
security settings. The option name may differ depending on the access  
point (or wireless router) you are using.  
You can change the WPS mode in control panel (  
(Menu) > Network >  
Wireless > OK > WPS Setting).  
Items to prepare  
Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi Protected  
Setup™ (WPS).  
Check if your machine supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).  
Networked computer (PIN mode only)  
166  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
 
Wireless network setup  
Connecting in PIN mode  
Machines with a display screen  
Press and hold the  
2 seconds.  
(WPS) button on the control panel for more than  
1
2
Connecting in PBC mode  
The eight-digit PIN appears on the display.  
Press and hold the  
2 seconds.  
(WPS) button on the control panel for more than  
1
You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the  
computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router).  
The machine starts waiting for up to two minutes until you press the WPS  
(PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).  
The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:  
a
Connecting: The machine is connecting to the wireless network.  
Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).  
2
b
Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the  
wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on.  
The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:  
a
b
c
Connecting: The machine is connecting to the access point (or  
wireless router).  
c
SSID Type: After completing the wireless network connection  
process, the AP’s SSID information is displayed on the LCD display.  
Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the  
wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on.  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the  
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.  
3
AP SSID: After completing the wireless network connection process,  
the AP’s SSID information appears on the display.  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the  
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.  
3
167  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
     
Wireless network setup  
Connecting in PIN mode  
Machines without a display screen  
The network configuration report, including PIN, must be printed (see  
1
Connecting in PBC mode  
In ready mode, press and hold the  
the control panel for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s PIN.  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) button on  
Press and hold the  
seconds until the status LED blinks quickly.  
(WPS) button on the control panel for about 2 - 4  
1
2
The machine starts connecting to the wireless network. The LED blinks  
slowly for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on the  
access point (or wireless router).  
Press and hold the  
(WPS) button on the control panel for more than  
2
3
4 seconds until the status LED stays on.  
The machine starts connecting to the access point (or wireless router).  
Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).  
You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the  
computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router).  
a
The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to  
the access point (or wireless router).  
The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you enter the eight-  
digit PIN.  
b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless  
network, the WPS LED light stays on.  
The WPS LED blinks in the order below:  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the  
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.  
a
The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to  
the access point (or wireless router).  
3
b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless  
network, the WPS LED light stays on.  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the  
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.  
4
168  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
     
Wireless network setup  
Re-connecting to a network  
Disconnecting from a network  
When the wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to re-connect  
to the access point (or wireless router) with the previously used wireless  
connection settings and address.  
To disconnect the wireless network connection, press the  
the control panel for more than two seconds.  
(WPS) button on  
When the Wi-Fi network is in idle mode: The machine is immediately  
disconnected from the wireless network and the WPS LED turns off.  
In the following cases, the machine automatically re-connects to the  
wireless network:  
When the Wi-Fi network is being used: While the machine waits until the  
current job is finished, the light blinks fast on the WPS LED. Then, the  
wireless network connection is automatically disconnected and the WPS  
The machine is turned off and on again.  
The access point (or wireless router) is turned off and on again.  
LED turns off.  
14  
Canceling the connection process  
Using the menu button  
To cancel the wireless network connection when the machine is connecting to  
the wireless network, press and release the  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) on the  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
control panel. You need to wait 2 minutes to re-connect to the wireless  
network.  
Before starting, you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless  
network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when  
the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your  
wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network.  
169  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
 
Wireless network setup  
Access point via USB cable (recommended)  
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a  
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over the  
Items to prepare  
Access point  
Network-connected computer  
Software CD that was provided with your machine  
A machine installed with a wireless network interface  
USB cable  
Press the  
(Menu) button on the control panel.  
1
2
3
Press Network > Wireless > WLAN Settings.  
Press the OK to select the setup method you want.  
Wizard (recommended): In this mode, the setup is automatic. The  
machine will display a list of available networks from which to  
choose. After a network is chosen then printer will prompt for the  
corresponding security key.  
Creating the infrastructure network  
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.  
1
Custom: In this mode, users can give or edit manually their own SSID  
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.  
, or choose the security option in detail.  
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
15  
3
Setup using Windows  
Shortcut to the Wireless Setting program without the CD: If you have  
installed the printer driver once, you can access the Wireless Setting  
program without the CD. From the Start menu, select Programs or All  
Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Wireless  
Setting Program.  
170  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
Wireless network setup  
Read and check The software End User License Agreement and Using  
Enhanced Features and Participating in Printer Usage Information  
4
If you cannot find the network name you want to choose, or if you want to  
Collection Program (optional). Then, click Next.  
set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.  
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point  
(SSID is case-sensitive).  
Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.  
Authentication: Select an authentication type.  
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may  
not be used, depending on the need for data security.  
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key  
can access the network.  
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the  
print server based on a WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key  
(generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase), which is manually  
configured on the access point and each of its clients.  
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,  
TKIP AES).  
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.  
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network  
password value.  
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate  
WEP Key Index.  
Select Configure the wireless network connection using USB cable  
on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then, click Next.  
5
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select  
the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next.  
6
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has  
security settings.  
Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router).  
171  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
If your printer supports Wi-Fi Direct, its corresponding screen will appear.  
Click Ok and Next.  
Ad hoc via USB cable  
7
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine  
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad-hoc wireless network by  
following the simple steps below.  
Wi-Fi Direct option appears on the screen only if your printer supports  
this feature.  
Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager  
Items to prepare  
Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Network Name is the model name and  
the maximum length is 22 characters (not including "DIRECT-XX-").  
Network-connected computer  
Software CD that was provided with your machine  
A machine installed with a wireless network interface  
USB cable  
Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.  
When the wireless network set up is completed, disconnect the USB  
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.  
8
Creating the ad hoc network in Windows  
Select software to be installed.  
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.  
9
1
After selecting the components, you can also change the printer driver  
name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine as  
the default machine. Click Next.  
Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine.  
10  
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
3
If you want to register your machine with the Samusng web site and  
receive useful information, click On-line Registration. If not, click  
Finish.  
11  
172  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
 
Wireless network setup  
Read and check The software End User License Agreement and Using  
Enhanced Features and Participating in Printer Usage Information  
Collection Program (optional). Then, click Next.  
4
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name you want (SSID  
is case-sensitive).  
Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.  
Channel: Select the channel. (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).  
Authentication: Select an authentication type.  
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may  
not be used, depending on the need for data security.  
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key  
can access the network.  
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).  
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.  
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network  
password value.  
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate  
WEP Key Index.  
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network  
has security enabled.  
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.  
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing  
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data  
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit  
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.  
Select Configure the wireless network connection using USB cable  
on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then, click Next.  
5
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your  
machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting.  
6
The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the  
settings and click Next.  
7
173  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Click Next.  
8
9
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the  
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network  
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be  
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the  
wireless network setting should also be Static.  
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB  
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.  
Select software to be installed.  
10  
11  
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless  
network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the  
static IP address.  
After selecting the components, you can also change the printer driver  
name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine as  
the default machine. Click Next.  
For the DHCP method  
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in  
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click  
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP  
address automatically (DHCP).  
If you want to register your machine with the Samusng web site and  
receive useful information, click On-line Registration. If not, click  
Finish.  
12  
For the Static method  
16  
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in  
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click  
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration  
values for the machine.  
Setup using Mac  
For example,  
Items to prepare  
If the computer’s network information is as shown follows:  
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
Access point  
Network-connected computer  
Software CD that was provided with your machine  
A machine installed with a wireless network interface  
USB cable  
Then, the machine’s network information should be as below:  
-
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.43  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)  
Gateway: 169.254.133.1  
174  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
 
Wireless network setup  
Access point via USB cable (recommended)  
When you set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.  
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point  
(SSID is case-sensitive).  
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.  
1
Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.  
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.  
2
Authentication: Select an authentication type.  
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may  
not be used, depending on the need for data security.  
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.  
4
can access the network.  
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.  
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the  
print server based on the WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret  
key (generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase) that is manually  
configured on the access point and each of its clients.  
5
Click Continue.  
6
Read the license agreement and click Continue.  
Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,  
TKIP, AES)  
7
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.  
8
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.  
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network  
password value.  
When the message that warns that all applications will close on your  
computer appears, click Continue.  
9
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate  
WEP Key Index.  
Click Wireless Network Setting button on the User Options Pane.  
10  
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has  
security enabled.  
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select  
the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next.  
11  
Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router).  
If the wireless network is already set up, the Wireless Network  
Information window appears. Select I want to install software with  
the current settings. (Recommended). Then, click Next.  
175  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
 
Wireless network setup  
If your printer supports Wi-Fi Direct, the following screen appears.  
Wireless network set up is completed. After the installation is finished,  
12  
14  
click Quit.  
Click Next.  
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a  
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Mac" on  
Ad hoc via USB cable  
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine  
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by  
following these simple directions.  
Items to prepare  
Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager  
Network-connected computer  
Network Name(SSID): The default Network Name is the model name  
and the maximum length is 22 characters (not including "DIRECT-").  
Software CD that was provided with your machine  
A machine installed with a wireless network interface  
USB cable  
Network Password is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64  
characters.  
Creating the ad hoc network in Mac  
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB  
cable between the computer and machine.  
13  
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.  
1
Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine.  
2
176  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
 
Wireless network setup  
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
3
Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.  
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.  
4
Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network  
password value.  
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.  
5
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate  
WEP Key Index.  
Click Continue.  
6
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network  
has security setting.  
Read the license agreement and click Continue.  
7
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.  
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.  
8
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing  
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data  
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit  
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.  
When the message that warns that all applications will close on your  
computer appears, click Continue.  
9
Click Wireless Network Setting button on the User Options Pane.  
10  
The window showing the wireless network settings appears. Check the  
settings and click Next.  
12  
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your  
machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting.  
11  
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name (SSID is case-  
sensitive).  
Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.  
Channel: Select the channel (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).  
Authentication: Select an authentication type.  
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may  
not be used, depending on the need for data security.  
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key  
can access the network.  
177  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is  
confirmed appears, disconnect the network cable and click Next.  
13  
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the  
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network  
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be  
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the  
wireless network setting should also be Static.  
If the network cable is connected, it may have trouble finding the  
machine when configuring the wireless network.  
The wireless network connects according to the network configuration.  
14  
15  
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network  
setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP  
address.  
Wireless network set up is completed. After installation is finished, click  
Quit.  
For the DHCP method  
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in  
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click  
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP  
address automatically (DHCP).  
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a  
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Mac" on  
For the Static method  
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in  
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click  
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration  
values for the machine.  
17  
Using a network cable  
For example,  
If the computer’s network information is shown as follows:  
Machines that do not support the network port will not be able to use this  
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
Then, the machine’s network information should be as shown below:  
-
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.43  
Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to  
work with your network, you will need to perform some configuration  
procedures.  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)  
Gateway: 169.254.133.1  
178  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
Wireless network setup  
IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)  
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a  
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over  
This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your machine  
using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. The MAC address is  
the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the  
Network Configuration Report.  
See your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless  
network, for information about your network configuration.  
Items to prepare  
Configuring the machine’s wireless network  
Access point  
Before starting you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless  
network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when  
the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your  
wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network.  
Network-connected computer  
Software CD that was provided with your machine  
A machine installed with a wireless network interface  
Network cable  
To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Printing a network configuration report  
Using SyncThru™ Web Service  
You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network  
configuration report.  
Before starting wireless parameter configuration, check the cable connection  
status.  
179  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
Wireless network setup  
Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the machine. If  
not, connect the machine with a standard network cable.  
Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list.  
1
7
SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a wireless  
network, access points, and wireless devices attempting to connect  
to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is  
case sensitive.  
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter  
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.  
2
For example,  
Operation Mode: Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless  
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.  
-
Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with  
each other in a peer-to-peer environment.  
3
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to  
4
-
Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with  
each other through an access point.  
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and Password.  
We recommend you to change the default password for security  
reasons.  
If your network’s Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select the SSID of the  
access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-hoc, select the machine’s SSID.  
ID: admin  
Password: sec00000  
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network  
Settings.  
Click Next.  
5
6
8
9
If the wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered  
password (network password) and click Next.  
Click Wireless > Wizard.  
The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup. If  
the setup is right, click Apply.  
Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration. However, if  
you want to set the wireless network directly, select Custom.  
180  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to  
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and Password.  
We recommend you to change the default password for security  
reasons.  
4
Disconnect the network cable (standard or network). Your machine should  
then start communicating wirelessly with the network. In case of Ad-hoc  
mode, you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously.  
ID: admin  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the  
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.  
Password: sec00000  
10  
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network  
Settings.  
5
6
18  
Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off  
Click Wireless > Custom.  
You can also turn the Wi-Fi network on/off.  
If your machine has a display, you can also turn on/off the Wi-Fi from the  
19  
machine’s control panel using the Network menu.  
Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing  
Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine. If not,  
connect the machine with a standard network cable.  
Wi-Fi Direct is an easy-to-setup peer-to-peer connection method between the  
Wi-Fi Direct certified printer and a mobile device that provides a secure  
connection and better throughput than ad hoc mode.  
1
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter  
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.  
2
With Wi-Fi Direct, you can connect your printer to a Wi-Fi Direct network while  
concurrently connecting to an access point, You can also use a wired network  
and a Wi-Fi Direct network simultaneously so multiple users can access and print  
documents both from Wi-Fi Direct and from a wired network.  
For example,  
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.  
3
181  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
-
-
Device Name: Enter the printer’s name for searching for your printer on  
a wireless network. By default, the device name is the model name.  
You cannot connect your mobile device to the internet through the  
printer’s Wi-Fi Direct.  
IP Address: Enter the IP address of the printer. This IP address is used  
only for the local network and not for the infrastructure wired or wireless  
network. We recommend using the default local IP address (the default  
local IP address of the printer for Wi-Fi Direct is 192.168.3.1 )  
The supported protocol list may differ from your model, Wi-Fi Direct  
networks do NOT support IPv6, network filtering, IPSec, WINS, and SLP  
services.  
The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct  
is 3.  
-
-
Group Owner: Activate this option to assign the printer the Wi-Fi Direct  
group’s owner. The Group Owner acts similar to a wireless access point.  
We recommend activating this option.  
Network Password: If your printer is a Group Owner, a Network  
Password is required for other mobile devices to connect to your  
printer. You can configure a network password yourself, or can  
remember the given Network Password that is randomly generated by  
default.  
Setting up Wi-Fi Direct  
You can enable Wi-Fi Direct feature by one of the following methods.  
From the USB cable-connected computer(recommended)  
From the machine (Machines with a display screen)  
After the driver installation is complete, Samsung Easy Printer Manager can be  
set and changes in the Wi-Fi Direct can be made.  
Select Network > Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct from the control panel.  
Enable Wi-Fi Direct.  
Samsung Easy Printer Manager is Available for Windows  
and Mac OS users only.  
From the network-connected computer  
If your printer is using a network cable or a wireless access point, you can enable  
and configure Wi-Fi Direct from SyncThru™ Web Service.  
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung  
Printers > Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Device Settings > Network.  
Access SyncThru™ Web Service, select Settings > Network Settings >  
Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct.  
-
Wi-Fi Direct On/Off: Select On to enable.  
Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct and set other options.  
182  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
 
Wireless network setup  
20  
For Linux OS users,  
Troubleshooting  
-
-
-
Print an IP network configuration report to check the output (see  
Access SyncThru Web Service, select Settings > Network Settings  
> Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct.  
Problems during setup or driver installation  
Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct.  
Printers Not Found  
Your machine may not be turned on. Turn on your computer and the  
machine.  
Setting up the mobile device  
USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine. Connect  
the machine to your computer using the USB cable.  
After setting up Wi-Fi Direct from the printer, refer to the user manual of the  
mobile device you are using to set its Wi-Fi Direct.  
The machine does not support wireless networking. Check the machine's  
user's guide included on the software CD supplied with your machine and  
prepare a wireless network machine.  
After setting up Wi-Fi Direct, you need to download the mobile printing  
application (For example: Samsung Mobile printer) to print from your  
smartphone.  
Connecting Failure - SSID Not Found  
When you have found the printer you want to connect to from your  
mobile device, select the printer and the printer's LED will blink. Press the  
WPS button on the printer and it will be connected to your mobile  
device.  
The machine is unable to find the network name (SSID) you have selected or  
entered. Check the network name (SSID) on your access point and try  
connecting again.  
If your mobile device does not support WPS, you need to enter the  
"Network Key" of a printer instead of pushing the WPS button.  
Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point.  
183  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
Wireless network setup  
Connecting Failure - Invalid Security  
PC Connection Error  
Security is not configured correctly. Check the configured security on your  
access point and machine.  
The configured network address is unable to connect between your  
computer and machine.  
-
For a DHCP network environment  
Connecting Failure - General Connection Error  
The receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when computer is  
configured to DHCP.  
Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine. Check the USB  
cable and your machine’s power.  
If the printing job is not working in DHCP mode, the problem may be caused  
by the automatically changed IP address. Compare the IP address between  
the product's IP address and the printer port's IP address.  
Connecting Failure - Connected Wired Network  
Your machine is connected with a wired network cable. Remove the wired  
network cable from your machine.  
How to compare:  
1 Print the network information report of your printer, and then check the  
2 Check the printer port's IP address from your computer.  
a Click the Windows Start menu.  
Connecting Failure - Assigning the IP address  
Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router) and machine.  
b For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.  
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware  
and Sound > Printers.  
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.  
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >  
Devices and Printers.  
c Right-click your machine.  
d For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties.  
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus,  
select the Printer properties.  
If Printer properties item has mark, you can select other printer  
drivers connected with selected printer.  
184  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
e Click Port tab.  
f Click Configure Port.. button.  
g Check if Printer Name or IP Address: is the IP address on the network  
For information on the access point (or wireless router), refer to its own  
user's guide.  
configuration Sheet.  
3 Change the printer port's IP address if it is different from the network  
You cannot enable wired and wireless networks at the same time.  
information report's.  
If you want to use the software installation CD to change the port IP,  
connect to a network printer. Then reconnect the IP address.  
Your computer, access point (or wireless router), or machine may not be  
turned on.  
Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the router is far from  
the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty receiving the  
signal.  
-
For a Static network environment  
The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured  
to static address.  
Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router), machine, and  
computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover network  
communication.  
For example,  
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:  
Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the  
communication.  
IP address: 169.254.133.42  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
If the computer and the machine are connected on the same network and it  
cannot be found when searching, firewall software might be blocking the  
communication. Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off and  
try searching for the machine again.  
Then the machine’s network information should be as below:  
IP address: 169.254.133.43  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)  
Gateway: 169.254.133.1  
Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can  
check the IP address by printing the network configuration report.  
Check whether the access point (or wireless router) has a configured  
security (password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or wireless  
router) administrator.  
Other problems  
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the following:  
185  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
Check the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver and change the  
settings to connect to the machine on the network. Due to the  
characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could change if the  
machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset.  
The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may  
interfere with the wireless signal.  
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including a microwave  
oven and some Bluetooth devices.  
Register the product's MAC address when you confogure the DHCP server  
on the access point (or wireless router). Then you can always use the IP  
address that is set with the MAC address. You can identify the Mac address  
of your machine by printing a network configuration report (see "Printing a  
Whenever the configuration of your access point (or wireless router)  
changes, you must do the product's wireless network setup again.  
The maximum number of device that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct is 3.  
If Wi-Fi Direct is ON, this machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g.  
Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the  
network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a  
user's information before connecting to the access point (or wireless router).  
If the access point is set to work with the 802.11n standard only, it may not  
connect to your machine.  
This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. Other wireless  
communication types (e.g., Bluetooth) are not supported.  
When using the ad hoc mode, in operating systems such as Windows Vista,  
you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use  
the wireless machine.  
You cannot use infrastructure mode and ad hoc mode at the same time for  
Samsung wireless network machines.  
The machine is within the range of the wireless network.  
The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless  
signal.  
Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless  
router) and the machine.  
Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router) are not  
separated by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete.  
186  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Samsung MobilePrint  
21  
23  
What is Samsung MobilePrint?  
Supported Mobile OS  
Samsung MobilePrint is a free application that enables users to print photos,  
documents, and web pages directly from your smartphone or tablet. Samsung  
MobilePrint is not only compatible with your Android, Windows and iOS smart  
phones but also with your iPod Touch and tablet PC. It connects your mobile  
device to a network connected Samsung printer or to a wireless printer through  
a Wi-Fi access point. Installing a new driver or configuring network settings isn’t  
necessary – just simply install the Samsung MobilePrint application, and it will  
automatically detect compatible Samsung printers. Besides printing photos,  
web pages, and PDFs, scanning is also supported. If you have Samsung  
multfunction printer, scan any document into a JPG, PDF, or PNG format for  
quick and easy viewing on your mobile device.  
Android OS 2.1 or higher  
iOS 4.0 or higher  
Windows Phone 7 or higher  
24  
Supported devices  
iOS 4.0 or higher: iPod Touch, iPhone, iPad  
Android 2.1 or higher: Galxy S, Galaxy S2, Galaxy Tab, and Android mobile  
devices  
22  
Windows Phone 7 or higher: Samsung Focus, Omnia7, and OmniaW, and  
Windows mobile devices  
Downloading Samsung MobilePrint  
To download Samsung MobilePrint, go to the application store (Samsung  
Apps, Android Market, App Store, Marketplace) on your mobile device, and just  
search for “Samsung MobilePrint.” You can also visit iTunes for Apple devices  
or Marketplace for Windows devices on your computer.  
187  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
     
AirPrint  
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to  
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and Password.  
We recommend you to change the default password for security  
reasons.  
4
CLX-330xW, CLX-330xFN, CLX-330xFW Series only.  
AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print directly from iPhone, iPad and  
iPod touch running the latest version of iOS.  
ID: admin  
Password: sec00000  
When the Embedded Web Service window opens, click Settings >  
Network Settings.  
25  
5
6
Setting up AirPrint  
Click Raw TCP/IP, LPR, IPP or mDNS .  
Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the  
AirPrint feature. You can enable the AirPrint feature by one of the following  
methods.  
You can enable the IPP protocol or mDNS protocol.  
26  
Printing via AirPrint  
Check whether the machine is connected to the network.  
1
For example, the iPad manual provides these instructions:  
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter  
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.  
2
Open your email, photo, web page, or document you want to print.  
For example,  
1
Touch the action icon(  
).  
2
3
4
Select your printer driver name and option menu to set up.  
Click Login in the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.  
3
Touch Print button. Print it out.  
188  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
AirPrint  
Cancelling print job: To cancel the printing job or view the print summary,  
click the print center icon ( ) in multitasking area. You can click cancel in  
the print center.  
189  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Google Cloud Print  
Google Cloud Print™ is a service that allows you to print to a printer using your  
smart phone, tablet, or any other web-connected devices. Just register your  
Google account with the printer, and you are ready to use the Google Cloud  
Print service. You can print your document or email with Chrome OS, Chrome  
browser, or a Gmail™/ Google Docs™ application on your mobile device, so you  
don’t need to install the printer driver on the mobile device. Refer to the Google  
website (http://support.google.com/cloudprint) for more information about  
Google Cloud Print.  
Click Login in the upper right corner of the SyncThru™ Web Service  
website.  
5
6
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to  
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and Password.  
We recommend you to change the default password for security  
reasons.  
ID: admin  
Password: sec00000  
27  
Registering your Google account to the printer  
If the network environment is using a proxy server, you need to configure  
the proxy’s IP and port number from Settings > Network Settings >  
Google Cloud Print > Proxy Setting. Contact your network service  
provider or network administrator for more information.  
Make sure the printer machine is turned on and connected to a wired or  
wireless network that has access to the Internet.  
You should create your Google account in the advance.  
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >  
Network Settings > Google Cloud Print.  
7
Open the Chrome browser.  
1
2
3
4
Enter your printer’s name and description.  
8
9
Visit www.google.com.  
Click Register.  
The confirmation pop-up window appears.  
Sign in to the Google website with your Gmail address.  
Enter your printer’s IP address in the address field and press the Enter key  
or click Go.  
If you set the browser to block pop-ups, the confirmation window will not  
appear. Allow the site to show pop-ups.  
190  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
Google Cloud Print  
Click Finish printer registration.  
Install the Cloud Print application on your mobile device.  
10  
1
Click Manage your printers.  
11  
If you do not have the application, download it from the application store  
such as Android Market or App Store.  
Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print service.  
Google Cloud Print-ready devices will appear in the list.  
Access the Google Docs application from your mobile device.  
28  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Printing with Google Cloud Print  
Tap the option  
Tap the send  
button of the document that you want to print.  
button.  
The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you  
are using. You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print  
service.  
Tap the Cloud Print  
button.  
Set the printing options if you want.  
Make sure the printer is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless  
network that has access to the Internet.  
Tap Click here to Print.  
Printing from the Chrome browser  
Printing from an application on mobile device  
The following steps are an example of using the Chrome browser.  
The following steps are an example of using the Google Docs app from Android  
mobile phone.  
Run Chrome.  
1
Open the document or email that you want to print.  
2
Click the wrench icon  
in the browser’s top right corner.  
3
4
Click Print. A new tab for printing appears.  
191  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Google Cloud Print  
Select Print with Google Cloud Print.  
5
Click the Print button.  
6
192  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for advanced  
machine setup.  
Fax  
 
Before you begin reading a chapter  
This chapter explains all the features available for this series' models to help users easily understand the features.  
You can check the features available for each model in the Basic Guide (see "Menu overview" on page 35).  
The following are tips for using this chapter  
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine’s functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing  
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
(Menu).  
For models that do not have the  
Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.  
194  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
   
Print  
Item  
Description  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Affects the resolution and clarity of your color output.  
Enhanced: This mode will generate printouts with  
sharp texts and smooth graphic/photo objects in the  
page.  
Screen  
To change the menu options:  
Detailed: This mode will generate printouts with  
sharp details over the entire page.  
Press  
(Menu) > Print Setup on the control panel.  
Normal: This mode will generate printouts with  
smooth tone over the entire page.  
Item  
Description  
Selects this option to print texts clearer than on a normal  
document.  
Clear Text  
Selects the direction in which information is printed on a  
page.  
Orientation  
Copies  
Allows you to append the required carriage return to  
each line feed, which is useful for Unix or DOS users.  
Auto CR  
You can enter the number of copies using the number  
keypad.  
Emulation  
Sets the emulation type and option.  
Specifies the number of dots printed per inch (dpi). The  
higher the setting, the sharper printed characters and  
graphics.  
Resolution  
Reduces the white gap caused by misalignment of color  
channels in color printing mode. Also black text will be  
overprinted on other colors.  
Trapping  
Improves the printing quality by selecting the document  
type for the current printing job.  
Document Type  
195  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
   
Copy  
1
Item  
Description  
Copy feature  
Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image (see  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Reduce/Enlarge  
If the machine is set Eco mode, reduce and  
enlarge features are not available.  
To change the menu options:  
In copy mode, press (Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.  
Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is  
easier to read, when the original contains faint  
markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 61)  
Darkness  
Improves the copy quality by selecting the document  
Original Type  
Layout  
CLX-330x Series / CLX-330xW Series: When the Scan to button’s LED is  
off, the machine is in copy mode.  
Adjusts the layout format such as poster, clone, ID copy,  
2/4-up, booklet, etc.  
CLX-330xFN Series / CLX-330xFW Series: Press  
(copy) on the  
control panel.  
Reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4  
pages onto one sheet of paper.  
1
2
Item  
Original Size  
Description  
Sets the image size.  
3
4
Layout > 2-up or  
Layout > 4-up  
This copy feature is available only when you  
load originals into the document feeder.  
196  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
       
Copy  
2
Item  
Description  
Copy Setup  
prints one side of the original on the upper half of the  
paper and the other side on the lower half without  
reducing the size of the original. This feature is helpful  
for copying a small-sized item such as business card.  
Layout > ID Copy  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Prints an image without its background. This copy  
feature removes the background color and can be  
helpful when copying an original containing color in  
the background, such as a newspaper or a catalog.  
To change the menu options:  
In copy mode, press (Menu) > Copy Setup on the control panel.  
Off: Does not use this feature.  
Adjust Bkgd  
Auto: Optimizes the background.  
Enhance Lev.1~2: The higher the number is, the  
more vivid the background is.  
CLX-330x Series / CLX-330xW Series: When the Scan to button’s LED is  
off, the machine is in copy mode.  
Erase Lev.1~4: The higher the number is, the lighter  
the background is.  
CLX-330xFN Series / CLX-330xFW Series: Press  
(copy) on the  
control panel.  
Item  
Description  
Resets the value or setting to the printer’s out-of-box  
state.  
Change Default  
Change Default >  
Copies  
You can enter the number of copies using the number  
keypad.  
197  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
   
Copy  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
Set the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you  
make 2 copies of a 3 page original, one complete 3 page  
document will print followed by a second complete  
document.  
Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is  
easier to read, when the original contains faint  
markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 61)  
Change Default >  
Darkness  
Change Default >  
Original Type  
Improves the copy quality by selecting the document  
On: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of  
originals.  
Prints an image without its background. This copy  
feature removes the background color and can be  
helpful when copying an original containing color in  
the background, such as a newspaper or a catalog.  
Change Default >  
Copy Collation  
Off: Does not use this feature.  
Change Default >  
Adjust Bkgd  
Auto: Optimizes the background.  
Off: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual  
pages.  
Enhance Lev.1~2: The higher the number is, the  
more vivid the background is.  
Erase Lev.1~4: The higher the number is, the lighter  
the background is.  
Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image (see  
Change Default >  
Reduce/Enlarge  
If the machine is set Eco mode, reduce and  
enlarge features are not available.  
198  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
Fax  
3
Item  
Description  
Fax Feature  
Sends a fax to multiple destinations (see "Sending a fax  
Multi Send  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
You cannot send a color fax using this feature.  
Sets your machine to send a fax at a later time when you  
To change the menu options:  
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu)> Fax Feature on the control panel.  
Delay Send  
You cannot send a color fax using this feature.  
Item  
Description  
Adjusts the brightness level to scan an original that is  
easier to read, when the original contains faint  
markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 69).  
Scans the original into memory and immediately  
transmits it when the current operation is finished.  
Priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple  
destinations between stations (example, when the  
transmission to station A ends, before transmission to  
station B begins) or between redial attempts (see  
Darkness  
Priority Send  
Send Forward  
The default document settings procedure good results  
when using typical text-based originals. However, if you  
send originals that are of poor quality, or contain  
photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce  
Resolution  
Forwards the sent fax to other destination by a fax. See  
Original Size  
Sets the image size.  
199  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
       
Fax  
To change the menu options:  
Item  
Description  
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Sending on the control panel.  
Forwards the received fax to other destination by a fax  
or PC. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax,  
this feature may be useful. See "Forwarding a received  
Rcv. Forward  
Item  
Description  
Sets the number of redial attempts. If you enter 0, the  
machine will not redial.  
Stores the received fax in memory without printing out.  
To print received documents, you need to enter the  
password. You can prevent your received faxes from  
being accessed by unauthorized people (see "Receiving  
Redial Times  
Redial Term  
Secure Receive  
Sets the time interval before automatic redialling.  
Sets a prefix of up to five digits. This number dials  
before any automatic dial number is started. It is useful  
for accessing a PABX exchange.  
Prefix Dial  
ECM Mode  
Adds additional documents to a reserved delay fax job  
Add Page  
Sends faxes using error correction mode (ECM) to  
makes sure the faxes are sent smoothly without any  
error. It may take more time.  
Cancels the delayed fax job which is saved in memory  
Cancel Job  
Sets the machine to print a report whether a fax  
transmission was successfully completed or not. If you  
select On-Error, the machine prints a report only when  
a transmission is not successful.  
4
Fax Confirm.  
Sending setup  
Prints a transmission report with a minimized image of  
the first page of the fax sent.  
Image TCR  
Dial Mode  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Sets the dialing mode to either tone or pulse. This  
setting may not be available depending on your  
country.  
200  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
 
Fax  
5
Item  
Description  
Receiving setup  
Automatically reduces an incoming fax page to fit the  
size of the paper loaded in the machine.  
Auto Reduction  
Discards a specific length from the end of the received  
fax.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Discard Size  
Blocks any unwanted faxes that you stored in the  
memory as junk fax numbers. This setting may not be  
available depending on your country.  
Junk Fax Setup  
To change the menu options:  
Enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer  
several different telephone numbers. You can set the  
machine to recognize different ring patterns for each  
number. This setting may not be available depending  
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving on the control panel.  
DRPD Mode  
Item  
Description  
Receive Mode  
Selects the default fax receiving mode.  
Specifies the number of times the machine rings before  
answering an incoming call.  
Ring To Answer  
6
Another setup  
Automatically prints the page number, and the date  
and time of reception at the bottom of each page of a  
received fax.  
Stamp RCV Name  
Rcv Start Code  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Initiates fax reception from an extension phone  
plugged into the EXT socket on the back of the  
machine. If you pick up the extension phone and hear  
fax tones, enter the code. It is preset to *9* at the  
factory.  
201  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
 
Fax  
To change the menu options:  
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Setup on the control panel.  
Item  
Description  
Resets the value or setting to the printer’s out-of-box  
state.  
Change Default  
Auto Report  
Sets the machine to print a report with detailed  
information about the previous 50 communication  
operations including time and dates.  
Setting this option to ON provides the ability to send or  
receive a fax while the line is busy. You can select to  
send or receive a fax by either picking up the extension  
phone receiver and pressing the Start button or by  
pressing the On Hook Dial button and pressing the  
Start button.  
Manual TX/RX  
202  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
Scan  
7
Item  
Description  
Sets the image resolution.  
Scan feature  
USB Feature >  
Resolution  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Sets the color mode.  
USB Feature >  
Color Mode  
Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. If  
you select BMP, JPEG, TIFF, or PDF, you can select to  
scan multiple pages.  
USB Feature >  
File Format  
To change the menu options:  
in scan mode, press (Menu) > Scan Feature on the control panel.  
Adjusts the brightness level to scan.  
USB Feature >  
Darkness  
8
CLX-330x Series / CLX-330xW Series: When the Scan to button’s LED is  
on, the machine is in scan mode.  
Scan setup  
CLX-330xFN Series / CLX-330xFW Series: Press  
(scan) on the  
control panel.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Item  
Description  
Sets scan destination to a USB. You scan the originals  
and save the scanned image to a USB device.  
USB Feature  
To change the menu options:  
In scan mode, press (Menu) > Scan Setup on the control panel.  
Sets the image size.  
USB Feature >  
Original Size  
Sets the original document’s type.  
USB Feature >  
Original Type  
203  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
     
Scan  
CLX-330x Series / CLX-330xW Series: When the Scan to button’s LED is  
on, the machine is in scan mode.  
CLX-330xFN Series / CLX-330xFW Series: Press  
(scan) on the  
control panel.  
Item  
Description  
Resets the value or setting to the printer’s out-of-box  
state.  
Change Default  
Resets the USB scan setting to the printer’s out-of-box  
state.  
Change Default >  
USB Default  
204  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
System setup  
9
Item  
Power Save  
Description  
Machine setup  
Sets how long the machine waits before going to power  
save mode.  
When the machine does not receive data for an extended  
period of time, power consumption is automatically  
lowered.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Auto Power Off  
Turns power off automatically when the machine has  
been in power save mode for the length of time set in  
Auto Power Off > On > Timeout.  
To change the menu options:  
Press  
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup on the control panel.  
This option only appears in the CLX-330x  
Series/CLX-330xW Series.  
Item  
Description  
To turn the machine on again, press the  
(Power/Wakeup) button on the control panel  
(make sure the main power switch is on).  
Sets the machine ID which will be printed at the top of  
each fax page that you send.  
Machine ID  
Sets the fax number which will be printed at the top of  
each fax page that you send.  
If you run the printer driver or Samsung Easy  
Printer Manager, the time automatically  
extends.  
Fax Number  
Date & Time  
Clock Mode  
Sets the date and time.  
While the machine is connected to the  
network or working on a print job, Auto  
Power Off feature doesn't work.  
Selects the format for displaying time between 12 hr. and  
24 hr.  
Sets the language of the text that appears on the control  
panel display.  
Language  
205  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
     
System setup  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
You can set the condition to wake up from power-save  
mode.  
Determine whether or not the machine continues  
printing when it detects the paper does not match the  
paper settings.  
On: The machine wake up from the power save mode  
on the following cases:  
30 Sec: If a paper mismatch occurs, an error message  
will display. The machine waits for about 30 second,  
then automatically clear the message and continue  
printing.  
Wakeup Event  
-
-
-
Pressing any button  
Auto Continue  
Opening or closing the paper tray  
Inserting paper in the document feeder  
0 Sec: Even though a paper mismatch occurs, the  
Off: The machine wake up from the power save mode  
only when the Power/Wakeup button is pressed.  
machine continues printing.  
Off: If a paper mismatch occurs, the machine waits  
Sets the time that the machine remembers previously  
used copy settings. After the timeout, the machine  
restores the default copy settings.  
until you insert the correct paper.  
System Timeout  
Job Timeout  
Automatically substitutes the printer driver’s paper size  
to prevent the paper mismatch between Letter and A4.  
For example, if you have A4 paper in the tray but you set  
the paper size to Letter in the printer driver, the machine  
prints on A4 paper and vice versa.  
Sets the length of time the printer waits before printing  
the last page of a print job that does not end with a  
command to print the page.  
Paper Substit.  
Optimize print quality according to the machine’s  
altitude.  
The printer detects the printing data from computer  
whether a page is empty or not. You can set to print or  
skip the blank page.  
Altitude Adj.  
Humidity  
PrintBlankPage  
Optimizes print quality according to the humidity in the  
environment.  
206  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
 
System setup  
To change the menu options:  
Item  
Description  
Press  
(Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup on the control panel.  
Allows you to save print resources and enables eco-  
friendly printing.  
Default Mode: Select whether to turn the Eco mode  
Item  
Description  
on or off.  
Sets the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes,  
according to your requirements.  
Paper Size  
Eco Settings  
On force (On-Forced): Sets the Eco mode on with  
password. If a user wants to turn the Eco mode  
on/off, the user needs to enter the password.  
Paper Type  
Margin  
Chooses the type of the paper for each tray.  
Sets the margins for the document.  
11  
Select Template (Select Temp.): Selects the eco  
template set from the SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Sound / Volume  
10  
Paper setup  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
To change the menu options:  
Press  
(Menu) > System Setup > Sound/Volume on the control panel.  
Item  
Key Sound  
Description  
Turns the key sound on or off. With this option set to on,  
a tone sounds each time a key is pressed.  
207  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
System setup  
12  
Item  
Description  
Report  
Turns the alarm sound on or off. With this option set to  
on, an alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax  
communication ends.  
Alarm Sound  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Turns on or off the sounds from the telephone line  
through the speaker, such as a dial tone or a fax tone.  
With this option set to Comm. which means the speaker  
is on until the remote machine answers.  
To change the menu options:  
Press (Menu) > System Setup > Report on the control panel.  
You can adjust the volume level using On Hook  
Dial. You can adjust the speaker volume only  
when the telephone line is connected.  
Item  
Description  
Speaker  
a Press  
(fax) on the control panel.  
Prints a report on the machine's overall  
configuration.  
Configuration  
Supplies Info.  
Demo Page  
b Press On Hook Dial. A dial tone sounds from  
the speaker.  
c Press the arrows until you hear the volume you  
Prints supplies’ information page.  
want.  
Prints the demo page to check whether your  
machine is printing properly or not.  
d Press On Hook Dial to save the change and  
return to ready mode.  
Prints all of the fax number currently stored in  
the machine’s memory.  
Address Book  
Adjusts the ringer volume. For the ringer volume, you can  
select off, low, middle, and high level.  
Ringer  
208  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
   
System setup  
13  
Item  
Description  
Maintenance  
Prints a transmission report including the fax  
number, the number of pages, the elapsed time  
of the job, the communication mode, and the  
communication results for fax job. You can set up  
your machine to automatically print a  
transmission confirmation report after each fax  
job.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Fax Confirm.  
To change the menu options:  
Prints information on the faxes you have recently  
sent.  
Fax Sent  
Press  
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance on the control panel.  
Prints information on the faxes you have recently  
received.  
Fax Received  
Item  
Description  
Prints the document list currently stored for  
delayed faxes along with the starting time and  
type of each operation.  
When toner cartridge is empty, this option appears. You  
can clear the empty message.  
Schedule Jobs  
CLR Empty Msg.  
Supplies Life  
Shows the supply life indicators (see "Monitoring the  
Prints the fax numbers specified as junk fax  
numbers.  
JunkFax  
Prints information on your machine’s network  
connection and configuration.  
Network Conf.  
Prints a usage page. The usage page contains the  
total number of pages printed.  
Usage Counter  
Fax Options  
Prints the information of a fax reports.  
209  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
 
System setup  
Item  
Description  
Allows you to adjust the color setting such as contrast  
level, color registration, color density, etc.  
Custom Color: adjusts contrast, color by color.  
-
-
Default: optimizes colors automatically.  
Print Density: allows you to manually adjust the  
color contrast for each cartridge. It is  
recommended to use the Default setting for best  
color quality.  
Image Mgr.  
Tone Adjust.: The machine calibrates the toner  
density of machine for the best possible color print  
quality.  
Shows the machine’s serial number. When you call for  
service or register as a user on the Samsung website, you  
can find this.  
Serial Number  
TonerLow Alert  
Customizes the level to alert toner low or toner empty  
210  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
Network setup  
Option  
Description  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
You can activate or deactivate the following protocols.  
Net. Activate: You can set whether to use Ethernet on  
or off.  
Press  
(Menu)> Network on the control panel.  
Turn the power off and on after you change this  
option.  
Option  
Description  
Selects the appropriate protocol and configure  
parameters to use the network environment.  
Http Activate: You can sets whether to use  
SyncThru™ Web Service or not.  
Protocol Mgr.  
TCP/IP (IPv4)  
There are lots of parameters to be set. If you are  
not sure, leave as is, or consult the network  
administrator.  
Turn the power off and on after you change this  
option.  
WINS: You can configure the WINS server.  
WINS(Windows Internet Name Service) is used in the  
Windows operating system.  
Selects this option to use the network environment  
TCP/IP (IPv6)  
Ethernet Speed  
Wireless  
Configure the network transmission speed.  
Selects this option to use the wireless network.  
Turn the power off and on after you change this  
option.  
Reverts the network settings to the default values.  
(Reboot required.)  
Clear Setting  
This list shows information on your machine’s network  
connection and configuration.  
Network Conf.  
211  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
   
Network setup  
Option  
Description  
SNMP V1/V2: You have to enable this option to use  
SNMP V1/V2 protocol. Administrator’s can use SNMP  
to monitor and manage machines on the network.  
UPnP(SSDP): You have to enable this option to use  
UPnP(SSDP) protocol.  
Turn the power off and on after you change this  
option.  
MDNS: You have to enable this option to use MDNS  
(Multicast Domain Name System) protocol.  
Protocol Mgr.  
(continued.)  
SetIP: You have to enable this option to use SetIP  
protocol.  
SLP: You can configure SLP (Service Location  
Protocol) settings. This protocol allows host  
applications to find services in a local area network  
without prior configuration.  
Turn the power off and on after you change this  
option.  
212  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
4. Special Features  
This chapter explains special copying, scanning, faxing, and printing features.  
The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows 7.  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.  
 
Altitude adjustment  
Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the  
height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you  
on how to set your machine for the best print quality.  
You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer  
Manager program.  
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager  
(Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings. See "Device  
Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are.  
>
4,000 m  
(13,123 ft)  
1
3,000 m  
(9,842 ft)  
If your machine is connected to the network, you can set the altitude via  
SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page  
2
2,000 m  
(6,561 ft)  
3
You can also set the altitude in System Setup option on the machine’s  
1,000 m  
(3,280 ft)  
4
0
1
2
3
4
High 3  
High 2  
High 1  
Normal  
214  
4. Special Features  
   
Entering various characters  
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For  
example, when you set up your machine, you enter your name or your  
company’s name, and the fax number. When you store fax numbers or email  
addresses in memory, you may also enter the corresponding names.  
Key  
1
Assigned numbers, letters, or characters  
@ / . 1  
2
A B C a b c 2  
D E F d e f 3  
G H I g h i 4  
J K L j k l 5  
1
3
Entering alphanumeric characters  
4
5
Press the button until the correct letter appears on the display. For example, to  
enter the letter O, press 6, labeled with MNO. Each time you press 6, the display  
shows a different letter, M, N, O, m, n, o and finally 6. To find the letter that you  
6
M N O m n o 6  
7
P Q R S p q r s 7  
T U V t u v 8  
W X Y Z w x y z 9  
& + - , 0  
8
9
You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice.  
0
To delete the last digit or character, press the left/right or up/down arrow  
button.  
*
* % ^ _ ~ ! # $ ( ) [ ]  
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.)  
2
#
# = | ? " : { } < > ;  
Keypad letters and numbers  
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.)  
Special character sets may differ from your machine depending on its  
options or the models.  
Some of the follow key values may not appear depending on the job you  
are doing.  
215  
4. Special Features  
       
Setting up the fax address book  
4
You can set up speed number with the fax numbers you use frequently via  
SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter fax numbers by  
entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book.  
Using speed dial numbers  
When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax,  
enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you want.  
3
Registering a speed dial number  
For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the  
corresponding digit button on the number keypad for more than 2  
seconds.  
Select  
the control panel.  
(fax) >  
(Address Book) > New&Edit > Speed Dial on  
1
2
For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit button(s)  
and then hold down the last digit button for more than 2 seconds.  
Enter a speed dial number and press OK.  
You can print the address book list by selecting  
(fax) >  
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the  
message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial  
(Address Book) > Print.  
number, press  
(Back).  
5
Enter the name you want and press OK.  
Editing speed dial numbers  
3
4
5
Enter the fax number you want and press OK.  
Select  
the control panel.  
(fax) >  
(Address Book) > New&Edit > Speed Dial on  
1
Press the  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) button to return to ready mode.  
Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK.  
Change the name and press OK.  
2
3
4
Change the fax number and press OK.  
216  
4. Special Features  
         
Setting up the fax address book  
7
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
5
Editing group dial numbers  
6
Select  
the control panel.  
(fax) >  
(Address Book) > New&Edit > Group Dial on  
Registering a group dial number  
1
Select  
the control panel.  
(fax) >  
(Address Book) > New&Edit > Group Dial on  
1
2
Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK.  
2
3
Enter a new speed dial number to add and press OK, then Add? appears.  
Enter a group dial number and press OK.  
Enter a speed dial number stored in the group and press OK, Delete?  
appears.  
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the  
message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial  
Press OK to add or delete the number.  
4
5
6
7
number, press  
(Back).  
Repeat step 3 to add or delete more numbers.  
Select No at the Another No.? and press OK.  
Search by entering the first few letters of the speed dial’s name to put in  
the group.  
3
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Select the name and number you want and press OK.  
Select Yes when Add? appears.  
4
5
6
7
8
Searching address book for an entry  
Repeat step 3 to include other speed dial numbers into the group.  
There are two ways to search for a number in memory. You can either scan from  
A to Z sequentially, or you can search by entering the first letters of the name  
associated with the number.  
When you have finished, select No when Another No.? appears and  
press OK.  
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
8
217  
4. Special Features  
   
Setting up the fax address book  
Select ct  
(fax) >  
(Address Book) > Search&Dial > Speed Dial  
1
or Group Dial on the control panel.  
Enter All or ID and press OK.  
2
3
Press the name and number or the keypad button labeled with the letter  
you want to search.  
For example, if you want to find the name “MOBILE,” press the 6 button,  
which is labeled with “MNO.”  
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
4
9
Printing address book  
You can check your  
(Address Book) settings by printing a list.  
Select ct  
(fax) >  
(Address Book) > Print on the control panel.  
1
Press OK.  
2
The machine begins printing.  
218  
4. Special Features  
Printing features  
For basic printing features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic printing"  
If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing  
Preferences.  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
11  
Setting your machine as a default machine  
10  
Changing the default print settings  
Click the Windows Start menu.  
1
Click the Windows Start menu.  
Select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.  
1
2
Select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.  
Select your machine.  
2
3
Right-click on your machine.  
Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.  
3
4
Select Printing preferences.  
4
If Printing preferences has a , you can select other printer drivers  
connected to the selected printer.  
If Printing preferences has a , you can select other printer drivers  
connected to the selected printer.  
Change the settings on each tab.  
5
Click OK.  
6
219  
4. Special Features  
         
Printing features  
12  
Check the Print to file box in the Print window.  
1
Using advanced print features  
XPS printer driver: used to print XPS file format.  
The XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or  
higher.  
For models that provide XPS driver on the software CD:  
-
You can install the XPS printer driver when you insert the software CD  
into your CD-ROM drive. When the installation window appears,  
select Custom Installation. You can select the XPS printer driver in  
the Select Software window.  
For models that provide XPS driver from the Samsung website,  
www.samsung.com > find your product> Support or downloads.  
Click Print.  
2
3
Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK.  
Printing to a file (PRN)  
For example, c:\Temp\file name.  
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file.  
If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My  
Documents, Documents and Settings, or Users. The saved folder may  
differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are  
using.  
220  
4. Special Features  
   
Printing features  
Understanding special printer features  
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.  
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print window to change the print  
settings. The machine name, that appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use.  
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Select the Help menu or click the  
button from the window or press F1 on your keyboard and click on any option you want to know about (see "Using help"  
Item  
Description  
Multiple Pages per  
Side  
Selects the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and  
arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.  
221  
4. Special Features  
 
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
Prints a single-page document onto 4 (Poster 2x2), 9 (Poster 3x3), or 16 (Poster 4x4) sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets  
together to form one poster-size document.  
Poster Printing  
Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab  
to make it easier to paste the sheets together.  
Prints your document on both sides of a sheet of paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce  
a booklet.  
Booklet Printing  
This option is available only when you use the PCL/SPL printer driver. This option is not available when you use XPS driver.  
9
8
The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. Select the available paper Size option under the Paper tab to see what  
paper sizes are available.  
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available paper (paper without  
mark).  
or  
222  
4. Special Features  
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
Print on both sides of a sheet of paper (duplex). Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented.  
This option is available only when you use the PCL/SPL printer driver. This option is not available when you use XPS driver.  
If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of  
the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer.  
Skip Blank Pages feature does not work when you select the duplex option.  
None: Disables this feature.  
Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding.  
Double-sided  
Printing (Manual)  
Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars.  
Reverse Double-Sided Printing: Check this option to reverse the print order when duplex printing. This option is not available when you  
use Double-sided Printing (Manual).  
Paper Options  
Changes the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by entering in a percentage by which to enlarge or decrease the  
document.  
223  
4. Special Features  
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
Watermark  
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters  
reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document.  
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.  
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
c Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.  
Watermark  
(Creating a  
watermark)  
You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window.  
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.  
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
c Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options.  
d Click Update to save the changes.  
Watermark  
(Editing a watermark)  
e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.  
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
c Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.  
d Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
Watermark  
(Deleting a  
watermark)  
224  
4. Special Features  
     
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
This option is available only when you use the PCL/SPL printer driver. This option is not available when you use XPS driver  
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document.  
Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing  
exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load  
preprinted letterhead paper in the machine: just print the letterhead overlay on your document.  
Overlay  
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.  
The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark.  
The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.  
a To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences.  
b Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list. Edit Overlay window appears.  
c In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.  
Overlay  
d In the Save As window, type a name in the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary (The default is C:\Formover).  
e Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.  
(Creating a new page  
overlay)  
f
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive.  
225  
4. Special Features  
 
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
a Click the Advanced tab.  
b Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.  
c If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit... from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you  
want to use.  
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the Open window.  
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay  
List box.  
Overlay  
(Using a page overlay)  
d If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a  
document for printing, asking you to confirm printing an overlay on your document.  
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document.  
e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
a In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.  
b Select Edit in the Text drop down list.  
c Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.  
d Click Delete.  
Overlay  
(Deleting a page  
overlay)  
e When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.  
f
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.  
13  
Mac printing  
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It means that the features are not supported.  
226  
4. Special Features  
       
Printing features  
Printing a document  
Printing multiple pages on one sheet  
When you print with a Mac, you need to check the printer driver settings in each  
application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Mac:  
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature  
provides a cost-effective way to print draft copies.  
Open the document to print.  
Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.  
1
1
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some  
applications).  
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages  
per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print  
2
2
on one sheet of paper.  
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make  
sure that your machine is selected. Click OK.  
3
Select the other options to use.  
3
Open the File menu and click Print.  
Click Print.  
4
4
The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet  
of paper.  
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.  
5
Click Print.  
6
Printing on both sides of the paper  
Changing printer settings  
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It  
means that the features are not supported (see "Variety feature" on page  
10).  
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.  
Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name,  
which appears in the printer properties window, may differ depending on the  
machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties  
window is similar to the following.  
227  
4. Special Features  
   
Printing features  
Before printing in the duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding  
your finished document. The binding options are, as follows:  
Using help  
Click the question mark on the bottom-left corner of the window and click on  
the topic you want to know about. A pop-up window appears with information  
about that option's feature, which is provided from the driver.  
Long-Edge Binding: This option is the conventional layout used in book  
binding.  
Short-Edge Binding: This option is the type often used with calendars.  
From your Mac application, select Print from the File menu.  
1
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation.  
Select a binding orientation from the Two-Sided option.  
Select the other options to use.  
2
3
4
5
Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper.  
If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the second copy might  
print on the same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both sides of paper  
when you are printing more than 1 copy.  
14  
Linux printing  
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It  
means that the features are not supported.  
228  
4. Special Features  
     
Printing features  
Advanced: Sets the print resolution, paper source, and destination.  
Printing from applications  
Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window.  
There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX  
Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such  
application.  
5
6
7
Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.  
The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your  
print job.  
Open an application, and select Print from the File menu  
1
To abort the current job, click Cancel.  
Select Print directly using lpr.  
2
In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from the  
3
Printing files  
printer list and click Properties.  
Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed  
at the top of the window.  
You can print many different types of files on your machine using the standard  
CUPS, directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you  
to do that, but the driver’s package replaces the standard lpr tool by a much  
more user-friendly LPR GUI program.  
4
General: Changes the paper size, the paper type, and the  
orientation of the documents. It enables the duplex feature, adds  
start and end banners, and changes the number of pages per sheet.  
To print any document file:  
Enter lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command line and press  
Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.  
1
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on  
models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other  
applications for odd-even printing.  
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print  
window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click  
Open.  
Text: Specifies the page margins and set the text options, such as  
spacing or columns.  
In the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and change  
the print job properties.  
2
Graphics: Sets image options that are used when printing image  
files, such as color options, image size, or image position.  
Click OK to start printing.  
3
229  
4. Special Features  
 
Printing features  
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window.  
Configuring Printer Properties  
4
Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration,  
you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer.  
Open the Unified Driver Configurator.  
1
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.  
Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties.  
2
The Printer Properties window appears.  
3
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:  
General: Allows you to change the printer location and name. The  
name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers  
configuration.  
Connection: Allows you to view or select another port. If you change  
the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use, you  
must re-configure the machine port in this tab.  
Driver: Allows you to view or select another machine driver. By  
clicking Options, you can set the default device options.  
Jobs: Shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to cancel the  
selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see  
previous jobs on the job list.  
Classes: Shows the class that your machine is in. Click Add to Class  
to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class  
to remove the machine from the selected class.  
230  
4. Special Features  
 
Scan features  
You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the network.  
The following methodoloqies can be used for scanning your documents:  
For basic scanning features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic scanning"  
Scan to PC: Scan the originals from the control panel. Then, the scanned  
data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder (see  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various  
factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the  
size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus, depending  
on your system and what you are scanning, you may not be able to scan  
at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced dpi.  
TWAIN: TWAIN is the one of a preset imaging applications. Scanning an  
image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the  
scanning process. This feature can be used via the local connection or the  
234).  
Samsung Scan Assistant/Samsung Easy Document Creator: You can use  
15  
this program to scan images or documents.  
Basic scanning method  
-
-
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature, your  
computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB cable  
USB Memory: You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto  
an USB memory device.  
231  
4. Special Features  
     
Scan features  
16  
17  
Setting the scan settings in the computer  
Scanning from network connected machine  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be able  
Make sure the printer driver is installed on your computer using the software CD,  
since the printer driver includes the scan program (see "Installing the driver  
Open Samsung Easy Printer Manager (see "Using Samsung Easy  
1
Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List.  
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on  
1
Select Scan to PC Settings menu.  
3
Select the option you want.  
4
Select  
(Scan) > Scan to PC > Network PC on the control panel.  
Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on  
the device.  
2
Basic tab: Contains settings related to general scan and device  
settings.  
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection, or select  
Enable Scan from Device Panel in Samsung Easy Printer Manager >  
Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.  
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PCSettings.  
Press Save > OK.  
5
Select your registered computer ID, and enter the Password if  
necessary.  
3
232  
4. Special Features  
   
Scan features  
The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be  
able to use this feature (see "Features by models" on page 7).  
ID is the same ID as the registered scan ID for Samsung Easy Printer  
Manager > Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PCSettings.  
Password is the 4 digit number registered password for Samsung Easy  
The WSD feature works only with Windows Vista® or later version that are  
the WSD-compliant computer.  
The following installation steps are based on Windows 7 computer.  
Printer Manager >  
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PC  
Settings.  
Installing a WSD Printer Driver  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
4
5
SelectStart > Control Panel > Devices and Printers > Add a printer.  
Scanning begins.  
1
Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer from the wizard.  
2
Scanned image is saved in computer’s C:\Users\users name\My  
Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating  
system or the application you are using.  
In the printers list, select the one you want to use, and then click Next.  
3
The IP address for WSD printer is http://IP address/ws/ (example: http://  
111.111.111.111/ws/).  
18  
If no WSD printer is displayed in the list, click The printer that I want isn't  
listed > Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname and select  
Web Services Device from Device type. Then enter the printer's IP  
address.  
Scanning to WSD  
Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on a connected computer if the  
computer supports the WSD (Web Service for Device) feature. To use the WSD  
feature, you need to install the WSD printer driver on your computer. For  
Windows 7, you can install the WSD driver by Control Panel > Devices and  
Printers > Add a printer. Click Add a network printer from the wizard.  
Follow the instructions in the installation window.  
4
233  
4. Special Features  
 
Scan features  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
Scanning using the WSD feature  
1
2
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
2
Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop.  
Click File > Import, and select the scanner device.  
Set the scan options.  
3
4
5
6
Select  
(Scan) > Scan to WSD on the control panel.  
3
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection. Or check the  
printer driver for WSD is correctly installed.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
20  
Select your computer name from WSD PC List.  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
Scanning begins.  
Scanning using the WIA driver  
4
5
6
Your machine supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for  
scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft  
Windows 7 and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN  
driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust images without using  
additional software:  
19  
Scanning from image editing program  
The WIA driver works only on Windows OS (not supported Windows 2000)  
with a USB port.  
You can scan and import documents at the image editing software such as  
Adobe Photoshop, if the software is TWAIN-compliant. Follow the steps below  
to scan with TWAIN-compliant software:  
234  
4. Special Features  
       
Scan features  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
For Windows, you need to download Samsung Scan Assistant from the  
Samsung website to install the printer software (http://  
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
2
For Mac, open the Application folder > Samsung > Samsung Scan  
Assistant.  
For Windows, you can use the OCR (Optical Character Reader) feature  
from Samsung Scan Assistant program.  
Click Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and  
Printers.  
3
Right-click on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes > Start Scan.  
4
From the Samsung website, download the Samsung Scan Assistant  
software to your computer. Then unpack and install the software.  
1
2
3
New Scan application appears.  
5
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your  
preferences affect the picture.  
6
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
7
21  
Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers, and start Samsung  
Scan Assistant.  
Scanning with Samsung Scan Assistant  
4
You need to download Samsung Scan Assistant software from the Samsung  
product > Support or Downloads).  
Select the Help menu or click the  
any option you want to know about.  
button from the window and click on  
Set the scan options.  
5
235  
4. Special Features  
   
Scan features  
Click Scan.  
6
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the latest  
version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.  
22  
Mac scanning  
Scanning from network connected machine  
Scanning from USB connected machine  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
Network or wireless model only (see "Features by models" on page 7).  
1
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
1
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on  
2
Start Applications and click Image Capture.  
3
Start Applications and click Image Capture.  
3
If No Image Capture device connected message appears, disconnect the  
USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem continues, refer to the Image  
Capture’s help.  
According to OS, follow steps below.  
4
For 10.4  
-
-
Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.  
Select the option you want.  
4
Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make sure that Use  
TWAIN software checkbox is checked.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
5
236  
4. Special Features  
 
Scan features  
23  
-
Click Connect.  
Linux scanning  
If a warning message appears, click Change Port.. to select port,  
or If TWAIN UI appears, click Change Port.. from the Preference  
tab and select a new port.  
Scanning  
For 10.5  
-
-
Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your  
machine in Bonjour Devices.  
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop.  
2
3
-
If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the Mac OS X10.4 steps  
above.  
Click the  
button to switch to Scanners Configuration.  
For 10.6 -10.8, select your device below SHARED.  
Set the scan options on this program.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
5
6
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the  
latest version. Image Capture operates properly Mac OS X 10.4.7 or  
higher.  
For more information, refer to the Image Capture’s help.  
You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe  
Photoshop.  
237  
4. Special Features  
 
Scan features  
Select the scanner on the list.  
The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the  
Preview Pane.  
4
8
Click Properties.  
5
Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview  
Pane.  
9
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
6
Select the option you want.  
10  
11  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
From the Scanner Properties window, click Preview.  
7
For later use, you can save as your scan settings and add it to the Job Type  
drop-down list.  
238  
4. Special Features  
Scan features  
Editing an image with Image Manager  
The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools  
to edit your scanned image.  
239  
4. Special Features  
Fax features  
25  
For basic faxing features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic faxing" on  
Redialing the fax number  
This function is not supported for CLX-330x/CLX-330xW Series (see  
Press  
(Redial/Pause) button on the control panel.  
1
2
Select the fax number you want.  
24  
Ten recently sent fax numbers with ten received Caller IDs are shown.  
Automatic redialing  
When an original is loaded in the document feeder, the machine  
automatically begins to send.  
3
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send  
a fax, the machine automatically redials the number. The redial time depends on  
the country's factory default setting.  
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another  
page. Load another original and press OK. When you have finished,  
select No when Another Page? appears.  
When the display shows Retry Redial?, press  
(Start) button to redial the  
26  
number without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing, press  
(Cancel  
Confirming a transmission  
or Stop/Clear).  
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts.  
When the last page of your original has been sent successfully, the machine  
beeps and returns to ready mode.  
Press  
panel.  
(fax) >  
(Menu)> Fax Setup > Sending on the control  
1
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears  
on the display. If you receive an error message, press  
to clear the message and try to send the fax again.  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear)  
Select Redial Times or Redial Term you want.  
2
3
Select the option you want.  
240  
4. Special Features  
         
Fax features  
Open the document to be sent.  
1
2
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each  
Select Print from the File menu.  
time sending a fax is completed. Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Setup  
The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different  
> Sending > Send Report on the control panel.  
depending on your application.  
Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window  
Click Print or OK.  
27  
3
4
5
Sending a fax in the computer  
Enter the recipients’ numbers and select the option  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
To use this feature, set the option on the control panel:  
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Rcv. Forward > Forward  
To PC > On on the control panel.  
You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine.  
To send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program  
must be installed. This program will be installed when you installed the printer  
driver.  
241  
4. Special Features  
   
Fax features  
You can add up to 10 destinations.  
Select the Help menu or click the  
any option you want to know about.  
button from the window and click on  
Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another group  
dial numbers anymore.  
Click Send.  
6
Enter the job name and the time.  
8
9
28  
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the fax will be sent at that time  
on the following day.  
Delaying a fax transmission  
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be  
present. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.  
The original is scanned into memory before transmission.  
The machine returns to ready mode. The display reminds you that you  
are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder.  
1
Press  
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs.  
Press (Menu) > Fax Feature > Delay Send on the control panel.  
(fax) on the control panel.  
You can check the list of delayed fax jobs.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press  
(Menu) > System Setup > Report > Schedule Jobs on the  
control panel.  
Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK.  
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.  
To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes highlights and repeat  
steps 5.  
242  
4. Special Features  
   
Fax features  
29  
Adding documents to a reserved fax  
Sending a priority fax  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder.  
1
This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of reserved  
operations. The original is scanned into memory and immediately transmitted  
when the current operation is finished.  
Press  
panel.  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Add Page on the control  
2
3
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
Select the fax job and press OK.  
1
documents face up into the document feeder.  
When you have finished, select No when Another Page? appears. The  
machine scans the original into memory.  
Press  
control panel.  
(Fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Priority Send on the  
2
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
4
Enter the destination fax number and press OK.  
3
4
5
Canceling a reserved fax job  
Enter the job name and press OK.  
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another  
pages. Load another original and press OK.  
Press  
panel.  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Cancel Job on the control  
1
When you have finished, select No when Another Page? appears.  
Select the fax job you want and press OK.  
2
3
The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinations.  
Press OK when Yes highlights.  
The selected fax is deleted from memory.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
4
243  
4. Special Features  
       
Fax features  
30  
31  
Forwarding a received fax  
Forwarding a sent fax to another destination  
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination  
by a fax. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax, this feature may be  
useful.  
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination  
by a fax. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax, this feature may be  
useful.  
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Receive Forward or Rcv.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder.  
1
1
Forward >Forward to Fax or Forward to PC > Forward on the control  
panel.  
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Send Forward > Forward  
2
to Fax > On on the control panel.  
Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional  
Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional  
To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been  
completed, select Forward&Print.  
Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server address and  
press OK.  
Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server address and  
press OK.  
2
3
4
Enter the starting tim and ending time, then press OK.  
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
3
4
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.  
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.  
244  
4. Special Features  
       
Fax features  
32  
Open with default application: After receiving the fax, open it with  
default application.  
Receiving a fax in the computer  
None: After receiving a fax, the machine does not notify the user or  
opens the application.  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
Press Save > OK.  
5
To use this feature, set the option on the control panel:  
33  
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Rcv. Forward > Forward  
to PC > Forward the control panel.  
Changing the receive modes  
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Receive Mode  
1
2
Open the Samsung Easy Printer Manager.  
on the control panel.  
1
2
3
4
Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List.  
Select Fax to PC Settings menu.  
Select the option you want.  
Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax  
reception mode.  
Use Enable Fax Receiving from Device to change the fax settings.  
Tel: Receives a fax by pressing  
(On Hook Dial) and then  
Image Type: Convert the received faxes to PDF or TIFF.  
Save Location: Select location to save the converted faxes.  
Prefix: Select prefix.  
(Start) button.  
Ans/Fax: Is for when an answering machine attached to your  
machine. Your machine answers an incoming call, and the caller can  
leave a message on the answering machine. If the fax machine  
senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically switches to  
Fax mode to receive the fax.  
Print received fax: After receiving the fax, set prints information for  
the received fax.  
Notify me when complete: Set to show the popup window to  
notify receiving a fax.  
245  
4. Special Features  
     
Fax features  
35  
To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the EXT socket  
on the back of your machine.  
Receiving in Answering Machine/Fax mode  
To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on  
the back of your machine. If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine  
stores the message. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it  
automatically starts to receive the fax.  
DRPD: You can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern  
Detection (DRPD) feature. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company  
service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to  
answer several different telephone numbers. For further details, see  
If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine  
is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket,  
your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined  
number of rings.  
This setting may not be available depending on your country.  
If the answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set the  
machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.  
Press OK.  
3
4
If the machine is in Tel mode, disconnect or switch off the answering  
machine with the fax machine. Otherwise, the outgoing message from  
the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation.  
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
34  
Receiving manually in Tel mode  
36  
Receiving faxes with an extension telephone  
You can receive a fax call by pressing  
(On Hook Dial) button and then  
pressing (Start) when you hear a fax tone.  
When you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket, you  
can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone,  
without going to the fax machine.  
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press the  
keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.  
246  
4. Special Features  
       
Fax features  
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last  
asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle number to whatever you  
want.  
When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call. The machine  
requires several rings to learn the pattern.  
3
4
When the machine completes learning, the display shows Completed  
DRPD Setup. If the DRPD setup fails, Error DRPD Ring appears.  
While you are talking over the telephone connected to the EXT socket, copy  
and scan features are not available.  
Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 2.  
DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or connect  
the machine to another telephone line.  
37  
After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify that the  
machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a call placed to a different  
number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is forwarded to the  
extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket.  
Receiving faxes using DRPD mode  
This setting may not be available depending on your country. Distinctive Ring is  
a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone  
line to answer several different telephone numbers. This feature is often used by  
answering services who answer telephones for many different clients and need  
to know which number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone.  
38  
Receiving in secure receiving mode  
This setting may not be available depending on your country.  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
Select  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > DRPD Mode  
1
2
> Waiting Ring on the control panel.  
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by  
unauthorized people. Turn on secure receiving mode, then all incoming faxes  
go into memory. You can print the incoming faxes with entering the password.  
Call your fax number from another telephone.  
247  
4. Special Features  
         
Fax features  
40  
Printing sent fax report automatically  
To use the secure receiving mode, activate the menu from  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive on the control panel.  
You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the  
previous 50 communication operations, including time and dates.  
Printing received faxes  
Press  
control panel.  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Auto Report > On on the  
1
2
Select  
on the control panel.  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive > Print  
1
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Enter a four-digit password and press OK.  
2
3
The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory.  
39  
Receiving faxes in memory  
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are  
making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing,  
your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon as you finish  
copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.  
If fax is received and being printed, other copy and print jobs cannot be  
processed at the same time.  
248  
4. Special Features  
   
Easy Capture Manager  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).  
Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).  
Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key. Now you can easily print your captured screen as captured or edited.  
250  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Samsung Easy Color Manager  
Samsung Easy Color Manager helps users do fine adjustments with 6 color tones and other properties, such as brightness, contrast, and saturation. Color tone  
changes can be saved as a profile and can be used from the driver or from inside of the machine.  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).  
Available for Windows and Mac OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).  
Helps Samsung color laser printer users to adjust color as they like.  
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).  
251  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Samsung AnyWeb Print  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).  
Available for Windows and Mac OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).  
This tool helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily, than when you use an ordinary program.  
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).  
252  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Easy Eco Driver  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).  
Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).  
With the Easy Eco Driver, you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing. To use this application, Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job  
checkbox in the printer properties should be checked.  
Easy Eco Driver also allows you simple editing such as removing images and texts, changing font’s attribute, and more. You can save frequently used settings as a  
preset.  
How to use:  
1
2
Open a document to print.  
Print the document.  
A preview window appears.  
3
4
Select the options you want to apply to the document.  
You can see the preview of the applied features.  
Click Print.  
253  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Using SyncThru™ Web Service  
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.  
1
Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for  
SyncThru™ Web Service.  
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to  
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and Password.  
We recommend you to change the default password for security  
reasons.  
2
SyncThru™ Web Service explanation in this user’s guide may differ from  
your machine depending on its options or models.  
ID: admin  
Password: sec00000  
1
Accessing SyncThru™ Web Service  
2
SyncThru™ Web Service overview  
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.  
1
Enter the machine IP address of your printer (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in  
the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.  
Your machine’s embedded website opens.  
2
Some tabs may not appear depending on your model.  
Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service  
Before configuring options in SyncThru™ Web Service, you need to log-in as an  
administrator. You can still use SyncThru™ Web Service without logging in but  
you won’t have access to Settings tab and Security tab.  
254  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Using SyncThru™ Web Service  
Information tab  
Security tab  
This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check  
things, such as remaining amount of toner. You can also print reports, such as an  
error report.  
This tab allows you to set system and network security information. You need to  
log-in as an administrator to view this tab.  
System Security: Sets the system administrator’s information and also  
enables or disables machine features.  
Active Alerts: Shows the alerts that have occurred in the machine and their  
severity.  
Network Security: Sets settings for IPv4/IPv6 filtering and Authentication  
servers.  
Supplies: Shows how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in  
the cartridge.  
Usage Counters: Shows the usage count by print types: simplex and  
duplex.  
Maintenance tab  
This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and  
setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect to  
Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu.  
Current Settings: Shows the machine’s and network’s information.  
Print information: Prints reports such as system related reports, e-mail  
address, and font reports.  
Firmware Upgrade: Upgrade your machine’s firmware.  
Contact Information: Shows the contact information.  
Settings tab  
Link: Shows links to useful sites where you can download or check  
information.  
This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and  
network. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab.  
3
Machine Settings tab: Sets options provided by your machine.  
Setting the system administrator’s information  
Network Settings tab: Shows options for the network environment. Sets  
options such as TCP/IP and network protocols.  
This setting is necessary for using the e-mail notification option.  
255  
5. Useful Management Tools  
Using SyncThru™ Web Service  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.  
1
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field  
and press the Enter key or click Go.  
Your machine’s embedded website opens.  
2
From the Security tab, select System Security > System Administrator  
3
Enter the name of the administrator, phone number, location, and email  
address.  
4
Click Apply.  
5
256  
5. Useful Management Tools  
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager  
The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic  
sections as described in the table that follows:  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
Available for Windows and Mac OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).  
The screenshot may differ depending on operating system you are using.  
For Windows, Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum  
requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager.  
Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an application that combines Samsung  
machine settings into one location. Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines  
device settings as well as printing environments, settings/actions and  
launching. All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your  
Samsung machine. Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user  
interfaces for the user to choose from: the basic user interface and the advanced  
user interface. Switching between the two interfaces is easy: just click a button.  
4
Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager  
To open the program:  
For Windows,  
Printer list  
The Printer List displays printers installed on your  
computer and network printers added by network  
discovery (Windows only).  
1
Select Start > Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung  
Easy Printer Manager > Samsung Easy Printer Manager.  
For Mac,  
Open the Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Easy Printer  
Manager.  
257  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager  
Printer  
information  
This area gives you general information about your  
machine. You can check information, such as the machine’s  
model name, IP address (or Port name), and machine  
status.  
Quick links  
Displays Quick links to machine specific functions. This  
section also includes links to applications in the advanced  
settings.  
4
If you connect your machine to a network, the  
SyncThru™ Web Service icon is enabled.  
2
You can view the online User’s Guide.  
Troubleshooting button: This button opens the  
Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs.  
You can directly open the necessary section in the  
user’s guide.  
Contents area  
Displays information about the selected machine,  
remaining toner level, and paper. The information will vary  
based on the machine selected. Some machines do not  
have this feature.  
5
6
Application  
information  
Includes links for changing to the advanced settings,  
preference, help, and about.  
Order supplies Click on the Order button from the supply ordering  
window. You can order replacement toner cartridge(s)  
from online.  
3
The  
button is used to change the user  
interface to the advanced settings user interface  
Select the Help menu or click the  
any option you want to know about.  
button from the window and click on  
5
Advanced settings user interface overview  
The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible  
for managing the network and machines.  
258  
5. Useful Management Tools  
 
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager  
Fax to PC Settings  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
This menu includes settings related to the basic fax functionality of the selected  
device.  
Disable: If Disable is On, incoming faxes will not be received on this device.  
Device Settings  
Enable Fax Receiving from Device: Enables faxing on the device and allow  
more options to be set.  
You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup, paper,  
layout, emulation, network, and print information.  
Alert Settings (Windows only)  
Scan to PC Settings  
This menu includes settings related to error alerting.  
Printer Alert: Provides settings related to when alerts will be received.  
Email Alert: Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email.  
Alert History: Provides a history of device and toner related alerts.  
This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles.  
Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the  
device.  
Basic tab: Contains settings related general scan and device settings.  
Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.  
Job Accounting  
Provides querying of quota information of the specified job accounting user.  
This quota information can be created and applied to devices by job accounting  
software such as SyncThru™ or CounThru™ admin software.  
259  
5. Useful Management Tools  
 
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator  
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile,  
The screenshot may differ depending on operating system you are using.  
and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format. These  
documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax. Whether you’re a  
student needing to organize research from the library or a stay-at-home mom  
sharing scanned pictures from last year’s birthday party, Easy Document Creator  
will provide you with the necessary tools.  
Availabe for Windows OS users only.  
Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum  
requirement for Samsung Easy Document Creator.  
Samsung Easy Document Creator is installed automatically when you  
install the machine software.  
6
Understanding Samsung Easy Document Creator  
To open the program:  
Select Start > Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung  
Easy Document Creator > Samsung Easy Document Creator.  
Click the information button to see the program’s version  
information.  
The Samsung Easy Document Creator interface is comprised of various basic  
sections as described in the table that follows:  
(Information)  
1
Click the help button to get the information of any option  
you want to use.  
(Help)  
260  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator  
Quick Scan  
Automatically scans with the settings provided in  
Configuration. You can pre-set the options such as image  
type, document size, resolution, or file type (see "Quick  
SNS Upload  
Provides an easy and quick way to upload files to a variety  
of social networking sites (SNS). Scan an image directly or  
select an existing image to upload to Facebook, Flickr,  
Picasa, Google Docs, or Twitter (see "Scanning to a Social  
2
Scan  
Provides more in-depth options for scanning documents  
on a one-by-one basis (see "Scanning" on page 262).  
4
SNS Upload will only be available after  
®
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1 has  
Text Converting will only be available after  
installing the optical character recognition (OCR)  
software proivided in a separate installation file.  
been installed (http://www.microsoft.com/  
download/en/details.aspx?id=22) and Windows  
XP or higher and Internet Explorer 7.0 or higher are  
required  
Image Scanning: Use for scanning single or mulitple  
3
pictures.  
E-Book  
Conversion  
Provides the ability to scan multiple documents in as one  
e-book or convert existing files into an e-book format  
Document Scanning: Use for scanning documents  
with text or text and images.  
5
6
Text Converting: Use for scanning documents that  
need to be saved in an editable text format.  
Send Fax  
Provides the ability to directly fax a document from Easy  
Document Creator if the Samsung Network PC Fax driver  
241).  
Book Scanning: Use for scanning books with the  
flatbed scanner.  
Favorites: User-created favorites for frequently-used  
scan settings.  
If the Samsung Network PC Fax driver is not  
installed, this will be grayed out.  
7
8
Configuration  
Device Name  
Provides the options for a Common and Quick Scan.  
Shows the scanning/faxing device ready to use.  
261  
5. Useful Management Tools  
             
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator  
Click Scan to scan a final image or Prescan to get another preview  
image.  
Search  
If you cannot see any device ready to use, click this button  
to find a device.  
5
Select to Save to Location, Send to E-mail, or Send to SNS.  
9
6
7
Click Search Now to automatically search for all  
devices to which you have access.  
Click on Save (Saving a Scan), Send ( E-mailing a Scan), or Share (  
Uploading).  
If there is room on the document glass, more than one item can be scanned  
Click the Help ( ) button from the upper-right corner of the window and  
click on any option you want to know about.  
at the same time. Use the  
tool to make multiple selection areas.  
7
Quick Scanning  
Using features  
Configuring Quick Scan  
Scanning  
To set up the Quick Scan options:  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
Click Configuration from the home screen.  
Click on Default to use the default settings, or select your own options.  
Click Apply to save changes.  
1
1
2
3
Click Scan from the home screen.  
2
3
4
Select the type of scanning or a favorites then click Start.  
Make adjustments to the image (Scan Settings and More Options).  
262  
5. Useful Management Tools  
         
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator  
Using Quick Scan  
Upload Existing File  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
Click SNS Upload from the home screen.  
1
1
2
3
4
5
Click Existing File to SNS > Start.  
Select the site and click Add Image to find the file to upload.  
Select a social networking site to send the image and click Next.  
Follow the instructions in each social networking site.  
Click Quick Scan from the home screen.  
Select a save location for the scanned images.  
Click Save to save the image.  
2
3
4
If there are some problems on accessing or uploading to each SNS site due  
to a network environment issue, it's needed to check security limitations  
established in your network with network administrator. To guarantee  
correct functioning of SNS upload in Samsung Easy Document Creator,  
unrestricted network environment is needed for HTTPS communication.  
Click Scan More to scan another image with the same settings.  
Scanning to a Social Networking Site  
Scan Directly  
Converting to an E-Book  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
1
Scan Directly  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on  
Click SNS Upload from the home screen.  
1
2
Click Scan to SNS > Start.  
3
Click E-Book Conversion from the home screen.  
Click Scan.  
2
4
263  
5. Useful Management Tools  
       
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator  
Click Scan to E-Book > Start.  
Enter the fax information (recipient’s number, cover page information,  
etc).  
3
4
4
Enter a name and author to be used as metatag information for the  
.epub file, a file name, and select a save location.  
Click Send.  
5
Click Save.  
8
5
Plug-ins  
Convert Existing Files  
Easy Document Creator will also create new plug-ins for Microsoft PowerPoint,  
Word, and Excel. These new plug-ins will be in a new Easy Document Creator  
menu on the applications’ menu bars: Scan to Office, Send Fax, and E-Book.  
Click E-Book Conversion from the home screen.  
1
2
3
4
Click Existing File to E-Book > Start.  
Click Add Image to find the file to convert.  
Enter a name and author to be used as metatag information for the  
.epub file, a file name, and select a save location.  
Click Save.  
5
Sending a Fax  
Click Send Fax from the home screen.  
1
2
3
Click add file and locate the file to fax.  
Click Send Fax.  
264  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Using Samsung Printer Status  
The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the  
Icon  
Mean  
Normal  
Description  
machine status.  
The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no  
errors or warnings.  
The Samsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user’s  
guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use.  
Warning  
Error  
The machine is in a state where an error might occur in  
the future. For example, it might be in toner low status,  
which may lead to toner empty status.  
Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine  
Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).  
The machine has at least one error.  
9
Samsung Printer Status overview  
If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Samsung  
Printer Status. Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install  
the machine software.  
You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually. Go to the Printing  
Preferences, click the Basic tab > Printer Status button.  
These icons appear on the Windows task bar:  
Toner Level  
Option  
You can view the level of toner remaining in each  
toner cartridge. The machine and the number of  
toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may  
differ depending on the machine in use. Some  
machines do not have this feature.  
1
2
You can set printing job alert related settings.  
265  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Using Samsung Printer Status  
Order Supplies  
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from  
online.  
3
User’s Guide  
You can view the online User’s Guide.  
This button opens the Troubleshooting  
Guide when an error occurs. You can directly  
open the troubleshooting section in the  
user’s guide.  
4
5
Close  
Close the window.  
266  
5. Useful Management Tools  
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator  
10  
The Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring  
machine devices. You need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified Driver  
Opening Unified Driver Configurator  
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop.  
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Driver Configurator  
icon will automatically be created on your desktop.  
1
2
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified  
Driver > Unified Driver Configurator.  
Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding  
configuration window.  
1
2
Printer Configuration  
Port Configuration  
267  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator  
Printers tab  
To use the on screen help, the Help or  
button from the window.  
View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon  
button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window.  
After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver  
3
Configurator.  
11  
Printers configuration  
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes.  
1
2
3
Switches to Printers configuration.  
Shows all of the installed machines.  
Shows the status, model name, and URI of your machine.  
268  
5. Useful Management Tools  
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator  
The printer control buttons are, as follows:  
Classes tab  
Refresh: Renews the available machines list.  
The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes.  
Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines.  
Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine.  
Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default machine.  
Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine.  
Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working  
properly.  
Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer’s properties.  
1
2
Shows all of the machine classes.  
Shows the status of the class and the number of machines  
in the class.  
Refresh: Renews the classes list.  
Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class.  
Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class.  
269  
5. Useful Management Tools  
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator  
12  
1
2
Switches to Ports configuration.  
Ports configuration  
Shows all of the available ports.  
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of each  
port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has  
terminated the job for any reason.  
Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and  
status.  
3
Refresh: Renews the available ports list.  
Release port: Releases the selected port.  
270  
5. Useful Management Tools  
6. Troubleshooting  
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.  
For errors that occur during the wireless software installation and settings, refer to the  
troubleshotting section in the wireless setting chapter (see "Troubleshooting" on page 183).  
 
Paper feeding problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Paper jams during printing.  
Paper sticks together.  
Clear the paper jam.  
Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray.  
Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper.  
Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper.  
Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.  
Multiple sheets of paper do not feed.  
Paper does not feed into the machine.  
Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight.  
Remove any obstructions from inside the machine.  
Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly.  
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray.  
The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine.  
The paper keeps jamming.  
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you are printing on special materials, use the  
manual feeding in tray.  
An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine.  
There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any debris.  
272  
6. Troubleshooting  
   
Power and cable connecting problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine is not receiving power,  
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a  
press it.  
(Power/Wakeup) button on the control,  
or the connection cable between the  
computer and the machine is not  
connected properly.  
Disconnect the machine’s cable and reconnect it.  
273  
6. Troubleshooting  
   
Printing problems  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The machine does not  
print.  
The machine is not receiving power.  
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a  
(Power/  
Wakeup) button on the control, press it.  
The machine is not selected as the default  
machine.  
Select your machine as your default machine in Windows.  
Check the machine for the following:  
The cover is not closed. Close the cover.  
Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 104).  
The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 83).  
Make sure the protect cover and sheets are removed from the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 83).  
If a system error occurs, contact your service representative.  
The connection cable between the computer and Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it (see "Rear view" on page 23).  
the machine is not connected properly.  
The connection cable between the computer and If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job.  
the machine is defective.  
You can also try using a different machine cable.  
The port setting is incorrect.  
Check the Windows printer settings to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct  
port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to  
the correct one.  
274  
6. Troubleshooting  
   
Printing problems  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct.  
Uninstall and reinstall the machine’s driver.  
The machine does not  
print.  
The machine may be configured incorrectly.  
The printer driver may be incorrectly installed.  
The machine is malfunctioning.  
Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a  
system error. Contact a service representative.  
The document size is so big that the hard disk  
space of the computer is insufficient to access the  
print job.  
Get more hard disk space and print the document again.  
The output tray is full.  
Once the paper is removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing.  
The machine selects print The paper option that was selected in the  
materials from the wrong Printing Preferences may be incorrect.  
paper source.  
For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab  
Select the correct paper source. See the printer driver help screen (see "Using help" on  
A print job is extremely  
slow.  
The job may be very complex.  
Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings.  
Half the page is blank.  
The page orientation setting may be incorrect.  
Change the page orientation in your application (see "Opening printing preferences" on  
The paper size and the paper size settings do not Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray.  
match.  
Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection  
in the software application settings you use (see "Opening printing preferences" on  
The machine prints, but  
the text is wrong,  
garbled, or incomplete.  
The machine cable is loose or defective.  
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already  
printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer  
that you know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine cable.  
275  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing problems  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The wrong printer driver was selected.  
The software application is malfunctioning.  
The operating system is malfunctioning.  
Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected.  
Try printing a job from another application.  
Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and back on again.  
Pages print, but they are The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner.  
Redistribute the toner, if necessary.  
blank.  
If necessary, replace the toner cartridge.  
The file may have blank pages.  
Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages.  
Contact a service representative.  
Some parts, such as the controller or the board,  
may be defective.  
The machine does not  
print PDF files correctly.  
Some parts of graphics,  
text, or illustrations are  
missing.  
Incompatibility between the PDF file and the  
Acrobat products.  
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image  
from the Acrobat printing options.  
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.  
The print quality of  
photos is not good.  
Images are not clear.  
The resolution of the photo is very low.  
Using damp paper can cause vapor during  
Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the  
resolution will be reduced.  
Before printing, the  
This is not a problem. Just keep printing.  
machine emits vapor near printing.  
the output tray.  
276  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing problems  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The machine does not  
print special-sized paper,  
such as billing paper.  
Paper size and paper size setting do not match.  
Set the correct paper size in the Custom in Paper tab in Printing Preferences (see  
The printed billing paper The paper type setting does not match.  
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab,  
is curled.  
277  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing quality problems  
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there  
might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem.  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Light or faded print  
If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner supply is low. Install a new toner cartridge (see "Replacing the  
If a vertical white streak or faded area still appears on the page even though the machine has enough toner supply, open and close  
the front door 3 ~ 4 times (see "Machine overview" on page 20).  
The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough.  
If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn  
the toner save mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver.  
A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine  
The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page  
91). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.  
The top half of the paper is  
printed lighter than the rest of  
the paper  
The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.  
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see  
278  
6. Troubleshooting  
   
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Toner specks  
The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough.  
The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 91).  
The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 91).  
A aB bC c  
A aB bC c  
A aB bC c  
A aB bC c  
A aB bC c  
Dropouts  
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page:  
A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job.  
A a B b C  
A a B b C  
A a B b C  
A a B b C  
A a B b C  
The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper.  
The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.  
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thick (see "Opening  
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.  
If white spots appear on the page:  
White Spots  
The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from paper falls to the inner components within the machine, so the transfer roller may be  
dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 91).  
The paper path may need cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 91).  
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.  
279  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Vertical lines  
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:  
The surface (drum part) of the imaging unit inside the machine has probably been scratched. Remove the imaging unit and install  
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:  
The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page  
91). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.  
Black or color background  
If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:  
Change to a lighter weight paper.  
Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions or a high level of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount  
of background shading.  
Remove the old imaging unit and install a new one (see "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 87).  
Thoroughly redistribute the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page 81).  
Toner smear  
Check the paper type and quality.  
Remove the imaging unit and install a new one (see "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 87).  
280  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals:  
Vertical repetitive defects  
The imaging unit may be damaged. If you still have the same problem, remove the imaging unit and, install a new one (see  
Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after  
a few more pages.  
The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative.  
Background scatter  
Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page.  
The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that  
the paper does not absorb too much moisture.  
If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams  
on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause problems.  
A
Or select Thick from the Printing Preferences window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 57).  
If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your software application  
or in Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 57). Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example:  
If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem.  
If you are using a new toner cartridge, redistribute the toner first (see "Redistributing toner" on page 81).  
Toner particles are around bold The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.  
characters or pictures  
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see  
Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example: If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging  
can occur causing this copy quality problem.  
281  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Misformed characters  
If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try different paper.  
Page skew  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality.  
Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack.  
Curl or wave  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl.  
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
282  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Wrinkles or creases  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality.  
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Back of printouts are dirty  
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 91).  
Solid color or black pages  
The imaging unit may not be installed properly. Remove the imaging unit and reinsert it.  
The imaging unit may be defective. Remove the imaging unit and install a new one (see "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 87).  
The machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative.  
283  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Loose toner  
Check the paper type and quality.  
Remove the imaging unit and then, install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 83).  
If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.  
Character voids  
Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black:  
You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it around.  
The paper may not meet paper specifications.  
A
Horizontal stripes  
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:  
The imaging unit may be installed improperly. Remove the imaging unit and reinsert it.  
The imaging unit may be defective. Remove the imaging unit and install a new one (see "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 87).  
If the problem persists, the machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative.  
284  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Curl  
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine:  
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Change the printer’s paper option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thin (see  
An unknown image  
Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.  
repetitively appears on a few  
sheets  
The high altitude may affect the print quality, such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the altitude setting for your machine (see  
Loose toner  
Light print or contamination  
occurs  
285  
6. Troubleshooting  
Copying problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Copies are too light or too dark. Adjust the darkness in copy feature to lighten or darken the backgrounds of copies (see "Changing the settings for each copy" on page  
61).  
Smears, lines, marks, or spots  
appear on copies.  
If the defects are on the original, adjust darkness in copy feature to lighten the background of your copies.  
Adjust background in copy setup removes the background color (see "Adjust Bkgd" on page 197).  
If there are no defects on the original, clean the scan unit (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 94).  
Copy image is skewed.  
Ensure that the original is aligned with the registration guide.  
The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 91).  
Blank copies print out.  
Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder.  
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.  
Image rubs off the copy easily.  
Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package.  
In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time.  
Frequent copy paper jams  
occur.  
Fan the paper, then turn it over in the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if  
necessary.  
Ensure that the paper is the proper type and weight (see "Print media specifications" on page 121).  
Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared.  
Toner cartridge produces fewer  
copies than expected before  
running out of toner.  
Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or heavy lines. For example, your originals may be forms, newsletters, books, or other  
documents that use more toner.  
The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made.  
Turn the machine off and back on.  
286  
6. Troubleshooting  
   
Scanning problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The scanner does not work.  
Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass, or face up in the document feeder (see  
There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan function to see if that works.  
Try lowering the scan resolution rate.  
Check that the machine printer cable is connected properly.  
Make sure that the machine printer cable is not defective. Switch the printer cable with a known good cable. If necessary, replace  
the printer cable.  
Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check scan setting in the Easy Document Creator or the application you want to use  
to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port (for example, USB001).  
The unit scans very slowly.  
Check if the machine is printing received data. If so, scan the document after the received data has been printed.  
Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.  
Message appears on your  
computer screen:  
There may be a copying or printing job in progress. Try your job again when that job is finished.  
The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again.  
The machine printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.  
The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly.  
Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on, then restart your computer.  
The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.  
Device can’t be set to the H/W  
mode you want.  
Port is being used by another  
program.  
Port is disabled.  
Scanner is busy receiving or  
printing data. When the  
current job is completed, try  
again.  
Invalid handle.  
Scanning has failed.  
287  
6. Troubleshooting  
   
Faxing problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine is not working,  
there is no display, or the  
buttons are not working.  
Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.  
Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet.  
Ensure that the power is turned on.  
No dial tone.  
Check that the phone line is properly connected (see "Rear view" on page 23).  
Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone.  
The numbers stored in memory Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly. To check that, print an address book list.  
do not dial correctly.  
The original does not feed into  
the machine.  
Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the original is the right size, not too thick  
or thin.  
Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed.  
The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced. Contact a service representative (see "Available maintenance parts" on  
Faxes are not received  
automatically.  
The receiving mode should be set to fax (see "Changing the receive modes" on page 245).  
Make sure that there is paper in the tray (see "Print media specifications" on page 121).  
Check to see if the display shows any error message. If it does, clear the problem.  
The machine does not send.  
Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass.  
Check the fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.  
The incoming fax has blank  
spaces or is of poor-quality.  
The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.  
A noisy phone line can cause line errors.  
Check your machine by making a copy.  
A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life. Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge"  
288  
6. Troubleshooting  
   
Faxing problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam.  
Some of the words on an  
incoming fax are stretched.  
There are lines on the originals Check your scan unit for marks and clean it (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 94).  
you sent.  
The machine dials a number,  
but the connection with the  
other fax machine fails.  
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other machine operator and  
ask them to solve the problem on their side.  
Faxes do not store in memory. There may not be enough memory space to store the fax. If the display indicating the memory status shows, delete any faxes you no  
longer need from the memory, and then try to store the fax again. Call for service.  
Blank areas appear at the  
bottom of each page or on  
other pages, with a small strip  
of text at the top.  
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. Check the paper size and type again.  
289  
6. Troubleshooting  
Operating system problems  
1
Common Windows problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
“File in Use” message appears Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.  
during installation.  
“General Protection Fault”,  
“Exception OE”, “Spool 32”, or  
“Illegal Operation” messages  
appear.  
Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again.  
“Fail To Print”, “A printer  
timeout error occurred”  
message appear.  
These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in ready  
mode or after printing has completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred.  
Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages.  
290  
6. Troubleshooting  
     
Operating system problems  
2
Common Mac problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine does not print PDF files  
correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or  
illustrations are missing.  
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options.  
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.  
Some letters are not displayed normally Mac OS cannot create the font while printing the cover page. The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on  
during cover page printing.  
the cover page.  
When printing a document in Mac with  
Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors  
print incorrectly.  
Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader.  
Refer to the Mac User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac error messages.  
291  
6. Troubleshooting  
 
Operating system problems  
3
Common Linux problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine does not print.  
Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the Printers tab in the  
Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines. Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list. If  
not, open Add new printer wizard to set up your device.  
Check if the machine is started. Open Printers configuration and select your machine from the printers list. Look at the  
description in the Selected printer pane. If its status contains Stopped, press the Start button. Normal operation of the machine  
should be restored. The “stopped” status might be activated when some problems in printing occur.  
Check if your application has special print options such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the command line parameter, then  
remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select “print” -> “Setup printer” and edit the command line parameter in the  
command item.  
Some color images come out all This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color space of the document is indexed color  
black.  
space and it is converted through CIE color space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System, you should  
upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions at  
www.ghostscript.com.  
Some color images come out in This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color space of the document is indexed RGB  
unexpected color.  
color space and it is converted through CIE color space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System, you  
should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions  
at www.ghostscript.com.  
The machine does not print  
whole pages, and output is  
printed on half the page.  
It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been  
reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug 688252.The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download  
the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this problem.  
292  
6. Troubleshooting  
 
Operating system problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
I cannot scan via Gimp Front-  
end.  
Check if Gimp Front-end has Xsane:Device dialog. on the Acquire menu. If not, you should install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the your  
computer. You can find Xsane plug-in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page. For the detailed information,  
refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front-end application.  
If you wish to use another kind of scan application, refer to application’s Help.  
“Cannot open port device file” Avoid changing print job parameters (e.q., via LPR GUI) while a print job is in progress. Known versions of CUPS server break the print  
error message appears when  
printing a document.  
job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port  
while printing, the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this situation  
occurs, try to release the port by selecting Release port in the Port configuration window.  
The machine does not appear  
on the scanners list.  
Ensure your machine is attached to your computer, connected properly via the USB port, and is turned on.  
Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system. Open Unified Linux Driver configurator, switch to Scanners  
configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine's name is listed in the  
window.  
Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional components of machine (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface (port), the  
situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of  
them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other user will encounter “device busy” response. This usually  
happens when starting a scan procedure. An appropriate message box appears.  
To identify the source of the problem, open the Ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner, port's symbol /  
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1 relates to LP:1, and so on. USB ports start  
at /dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In the Selected port pane, you can  
see if the port is occupied by another application. If this is the case, you should either wait for completion of the current job or  
press the Release port button, if you are sure that the present port application is not functioning properly.  
The machine does not scan.  
Ensure a document is loaded into the machine, ensure your machine is connected to the computer.  
If there is an I/O error while scanning.  
293  
6. Troubleshooting  
Operating system problems  
Refer to the Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages.  
4
Common PostScript problems  
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are used.  
Problem  
Possible cause  
Solution  
The PostScript file cannot be  
printed  
The PostScript driver may not be installed  
correctly.  
Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for  
printing.  
If the problem persists, contact a service representative.  
Limit Check Error report prints The print job was too complex.  
You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory.  
A PostScript error page prints  
The print job may not be PostScript.  
Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job. Check to see whether the software  
application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine.  
The optional tray is not  
selected in the driver  
The printer driver has not been configured to  
recognize the optional tray.  
Open the driver properties, select the Device Options tab, and set the tray option.  
When printing a document in  
The resolution setting in the printer driver may  
Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in  
Mac with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or not be matched with the one in Acrobat Reader. Acrobat Reader.  
higher, colors print incorrectly  
294  
6. Troubleshooting  
 
Quick Guide for Windows 8  
User  
This chapter will outline features specific to the Windows 8 OS. This chapter applies to users running Windows 8.  
The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or interface in use.  
Since this guide has been prepared based on Windows 8, some of the instructions may differ  
depending on the version. It may also be modified without prior notice.  
Understanding the screen  
Windows 8 provides both the new Start screen mode and the Desktop screen mode of the existing OS.  
Start Screen  
Desktop Screen  
296  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
 
System requirements  
Requirement (recommended)  
Operating  
Free HDD  
Space  
system  
CPU  
RAM  
®
®
®
1 GB (2 GB)  
16 GB  
Windows 8 Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 32-bit  
or 64-bit processor or higher  
®
Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to  
enable the Aero theme).  
DVD-R/W Drive  
297  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
 
Installing the driver locally  
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer  
using the cable.  
If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to  
install them using the supplied software CD (see "From the Desktop  
Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters (118 inches).  
You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows  
Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.  
1 From Charms, select Search.  
2 Click Store.  
3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.  
4 Click Install.  
Samsung Printer Experience app can only be used in the Start screen  
when V4 driver is installed. The V4 driver is automatically downloaded  
from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet.  
If not, you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website,  
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or downloads.  
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not  
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can  
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com > find your  
product > Support or downloads.  
2
From the Desktop Screen  
1
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, you cannot use the  
installed driver from the Start screen.  
From the Start Screen  
Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet and powered  
on.  
1
Make sure that the machine is powered on.  
2
Connect the computer and the machine with a USB cable.  
3
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.  
298  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
     
Installing the driver locally  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
1
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select Search  
> Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the  
letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.  
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window appears,  
click the window and select Run Setup.exe.  
Read and accept The software End User License Agreement and  
Using Enhanced Features and Participating in Printer Usage  
2
Information Collection Program (optional). Then, click Next.  
Follow the instructions in the installation window.  
3
299  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
Installing the driver over the network  
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  
You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s  
control panel that will show the current machine’s host name (see  
Machine that do not support networking will not be able to use this  
If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to  
install them using the supplied software CD (see "From the Desktop  
Samsung Printer Experience app can only be used in the Start screen  
when V4 driver is installed. The V4 driver is automatically downloaded  
from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet.  
If not, you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website,  
www.samsung.com >find your product > Support or downloads.  
You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows  
Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.  
1 From Charms, select Search.  
2 Click Store.  
3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.  
4 Click Install.  
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not  
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can  
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your  
product > Support or downloads.  
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.  
5
3
4
From the Start Screen  
From the Desktop Screen  
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered  
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP  
1
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, you cannot use the  
installed driver from the Start screen.  
From Charms, select Settings > Change PC settings > Devices.  
2
Click Add a device.  
3
Discovered machines will be shown on the screen.  
Click the model name or host name you wish to use.  
4
300  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
   
Installing the driver over the network  
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered  
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP  
Select Network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen.  
1
4
5
If the Connect Device window appears, check that the machine is  
connected to your network. Then, click Next.  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
2
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select Search  
> Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the  
letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.  
The firewall software might be blocking network communication. Before  
connecting the device to the network, disable the computer’s firewall.  
Discovered machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you  
wish to use and click OK.  
6
7
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window appears,  
click the window and select Run Setup.exe.  
Follow the instructions in the installation window.  
Read and accept The software End User License Agreement and  
Using Enhanced Features and Participating in Printer Usage  
Information Collection Program (optional). Then, click Next.  
3
301  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
Installing the driver over the wireless network  
Samsung Printer Experience app can only be used in the Start screen  
when V4 driver is installed. The V4 driver is automatically downloaded  
from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet.  
If not, you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website,  
www.samsung.com >find your product > Support or downloads.  
You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control  
panel that will show the current machine’s host name (see "Printing a  
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not  
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can  
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your  
product > Support or downloads.  
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.  
5
If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to  
install them using the supplied software CD (see "From the Desktop  
You must set up for wireless network using the supplied software CD in  
Desktop screen mode.  
You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows  
If you are using a computer without a CD-ROM, you can set up the  
wireless network from the machine’s control panel (see "Wireless  
Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.  
1 From Charms, select Search.  
2 Click Store.  
3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.  
4 Click Install.  
5
From the Start Screen  
6
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a  
machine driver to print from an application.  
1
From the Desktop Screen  
From Charms, select Settings > Change PC settings > Devices.  
2
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, you cannot use the  
installed driver from the Start screen.  
Click Add a device.  
3
Discovered machines will be shown on the screen.  
Click the model name or host name you wish to use.  
4
302  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
   
Installing the driver over the wireless network  
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.  
Select Configure the wireless network connection using USB cable  
on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then, click Next.  
1
2
4
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
Follow the instructions in the installation window.  
5
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select Search  
> Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the  
letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.  
For wireless set up or driver installation, refer to the wireless network setup  
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window appears,  
click the window and select Run Setup.exe.  
Read and accept The software End User License Agreement and  
Using Enhanced Features and Participating in Printer Usage  
Information Collection Program (optional). Then, click Next.  
3
303  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
Uninstalling the driver  
7
Follow the instructions in the window.  
5
From the Start Screen  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
Click on the Uninstall Samsung Printer Software tile in the Start  
screen.  
2
Follow the instructions in the window.  
3
If you cannot find a Samsung Printer Software tile, unintstall from the  
If you want to uninstall Samsung’s printer management tools, from the  
Start screen, right-click the app > Uninstall > right-click the program  
you want to delete > Uninstall and follow the instruction in the window.  
8
From the Desktop Screen  
From Charms, select Search > Apps.  
1
Search and click Control Panel.  
2
Click Programs and Features.  
3
Right-click the driver you want to uninstall and select Uninstall.  
4
304  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
     
Using Samsung Printer Experience  
Samsung Printer Experience is a Samsung application that combines  
The screenshot may differ depending on the model you are using.  
Samsung machine settings and machine management into one location. You  
can set device settings, order supplies, open troubleshooting guides, visit  
Samsung’s web site, and check connected machine information. This  
application will be automatically downloaded from the Windows Store if the  
machine is connected to a computer with an Internet connection.  
9
Understanding the Samsung Printer Experience  
To open the application,  
From the Start screen, select the Samsung Printer Experience (  
) tile.  
The Samsung Printer Experience interface comprises various useful features as  
described in the following table:  
Printer  
Information  
This area gives you general information about your  
machine. You can check information, such as the  
machine’s status, location, IP address, and remaining  
toner level.  
1
305  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
   
Using Samsung Printer Experience  
10  
2
User Guide  
You can view the online User’s Guide. You need to be  
connected to the Internet to use this feature.  
Printing from Windows 8  
This section explains common printing tasks from the Start screen.  
This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide  
when an error occurs. You can directly open the  
troubleshooting section in the user’s guide.  
Basic printing  
Order  
Supplies  
Click on this button to order replacement toner  
cartridges online. You need to be connected to the  
Internet to use this feature.  
Open the document to print.  
1
3
From the Charms, select Devices.  
2
Visit Samsung  
Links to Samsung printer website. You need to be  
connected to the Internet to use this feature.  
Select your printer from the list  
4
5
3
Select the printer settings, such as the number of copies and orientation.  
Printer Settings You can configure various machine settings such as  
machine setup, paper, layout, emulation, networking,  
and print information through SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Your machine needs to be connected to a network. This  
button will be disabled if your machine is connected via  
USB cable.  
4
Device List &  
Latest Scanned  
Image  
The scan list displays devices that supports Samsung  
Printer Experience. Under the device, you can see the  
latest scanned images. Your machine needs to be  
connected to a network to scan from here.  
6
This section is for the users with multi-functional printers.  
306  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
Using Samsung Printer Experience  
Click the Print button to start the print job.  
Opening more settings  
5
The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or  
options.  
You can set up more printing parameters.  
Open the document you want to print.  
1
From the Charms, select Devices.  
2
Select your printer from the list  
3
Click More settings.  
4
Cancelling a print job  
Basic tab  
If the printing job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as  
follows:  
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon  
) in the Windows task bar.  
(
You can also cancel the current job by pressing  
button on the control panel.  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear)  
307  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
Using Samsung Printer Experience  
Basic  
Layout settings  
This option allows you to choose the basic printing settings such as copies,  
orientation, and document type.  
This option allows you to set the various ways to layout your documents.  
Security tab  
Eco settings  
This option allows you to choose multiple pages per side to save media.  
Some features may not be available depending on the model or options. If  
this tab is not shown or disabled, it means that this features are not  
supported.  
Advanced tab  
Paper settings  
This option allows you to set the basic paper handling specifications.  
Job Accounting  
308  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
Using Samsung Printer Experience  
This option allows you to print with the given permission.  
Set up the scanning parameters such as image type, document size, and  
resolution.  
4
Confidential Printing  
Click Prescan (  
) to check the image.  
This option is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a  
password to print using it.  
5
6
Adjust the prescanned image with scanning operation functions such as  
rotate and mirror.  
11  
Click Scan (  
) and save the image.  
Scanning from Windows 8  
7
When you place the originals in the ADF (or DADF), Prescan (  
) is not  
This section is for the users with multi-functional printers.  
available.  
You can skip step 5, if the Prescan option is selected.  
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that  
can be stored on your computer.  
Scanning from Samsung Printer Experience  
The most frequently used printing menus are displayed for quick scanning.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
1
Click the Samsung Printer Experience tile on the Start screen.  
2
Click Scan (  
).  
3
309  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
Accessing management tools  
Samsung provides a variety of management tools for Samsung printers. For  
more information on each tool, refer to "Useful Management Tools" on page  
From the Charms, select Search > Apps.  
1
Find Samsung Printers.  
2
Under Samsung Printers, you can see installed management tools.  
3
Click the management tool you want to use.  
4
After installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them  
directly from the Start screen by clicking on the corresponding tile.  
310  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
   
Installing accessories  
When you install optional devices, such as optional tray, memory, etc, this  
machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices. If you cannot use  
the optional devices you installed in this driver, you can set the optional devices  
in Device Settings to use.  
From the Charms, select Search > Settings.  
1
Search for Devices and Printers.  
2
Right-click on your printer icon and select Printer properties.  
3
If Printer properties item has a mark, you can select other printer drivers  
connected with the selected printer.  
Select Device Settings.  
4
The Printer properties window may differ depending on the driver or  
operating system you are using.  
Select the appropriate option.  
5
Click OK until you exit the Printer properties window.  
6
311  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
   
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Suggested Solutions  
Samsung Printer  
Experience is not shown  
when you click more  
settings.  
Samsung Printer Experience is not installed.  
Download the app. from the Windows Store and  
install it.  
Machine information is  
not displayed when you  
click the device in the  
Devices and Printers.  
Check the Printer properties. Click the Ports tab.  
(Control Panel > Devices and Printers > Right-click  
on your printer icon and select Printer properties)  
If the port is set to File or LPT, uncheck them and  
select TCP/IP, USB, or WSD.  
The error related toast  
message pops up.  
312  
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User  
   
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact  
the Samsung customer care center.  
Country/Region  
Customer Care Center  
05 133 1999  
Web Site  
BOSNIA  
Country/Region  
ALBANIA  
Customer Care Center  
Web Site  
BOTSWANA  
0800-726-000  
42 27 5755  
0800-124-421  
4004-0000  
BRAZIL  
ANGOLA  
91-726-7864  
0800-333-3733  
0-800-05-555  
1300 362 603  
BULGARIA  
07001 33 11 , normal tariff  
7095-0077  
ARGENTINE  
ARMENIA  
CAMEROON  
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
www.samsung.com/ca  
AUSTRALIA  
CANADA  
CHILE  
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, €  
0.07/min)  
www.samsung.com/  
AUSTRIA  
AZERBAIJAN  
088-55-55-555  
8000-4726  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
From mobile 02-482 82 00  
www.samsung.com/ae  
BAHRAIN  
BELARUS  
BELGIUM  
BOLIVIA  
CHINA  
400-810-5858  
01-8000112112  
0-800-507-7267  
www.samsung.com/  
COLOMBIA  
810-800-500-55-500  
02-201-24-18  
www.samsung.com/  
www.samsung.com/be  
COSTA RICA  
www.samsung.com/  
www.samsung.com/  
COTE D’LVOIRE  
CROATIA  
8000 0077  
800-10-7260  
062 SAMSUNG (062 726 7864)  
313  
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
 
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
Country/Region  
CYPRUS  
Customer Care Center  
8009 4000 only from landline  
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)  
Web Site  
Country/Region  
FRANCE  
Customer Care Center  
01 48 63 00 00  
Web Site  
0180 5 SAMSUNG bzw.  
CZECH REPUBLIC  
DENMARK  
0180 5 7267864* (*0,14 €/Min.  
aus dem dt. Festnetz, aus dem  
Mobilfunk max. 0,42 €/Min.)  
Samsung Electronics Czech and Slovak, s.r.o., Oasis Florenc,  
Sokolovská 394/17, 180 00, Praha 8  
GERMANY  
70 70 19 70  
GEORGIA  
GHANA  
0-800-555-555  
1-800-751-2676  
www.samsung.com/  
0800-10077  
DOMINICA  
ECUADOR  
0302-200077  
www.samsung.com/  
80111-SAMSUNG (80111 726  
7864) only from land line  
1-800-10-7267  
www.samsung.com/  
GREECE  
(+30) 210 6897691 from mobile  
and land line  
www.samsung.com/  
1-800-299-0013  
www.samsung.com/  
EGYPT  
EIRE  
08000-726786  
0818 717100  
800-6225  
GUATEMALA  
HONDURAS  
www.samsung.com/  
www.samsung.com/  
800-27919267  
www.samsung.com/  
EL SALVADOR  
www.samsung.com/  
www.samsung.com/  
ESTONIA  
FINLAND  
800-7267  
09 85635050  
314  
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
Country/Region  
HONG KONG  
HUNGARY  
Customer Care Center  
(852) 3698-4698  
Web Site  
Country/Region  
Customer Care Center  
183-2255  
Web Site  
www.samsung.com/hk  
www.samsung.com/ae  
KUWAIT  
www.samsung.com/  
www.samsung.com/  
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
KYRGYZSTAN  
LATVIA  
00-800-500-55-500  
8000-7267  
1800 1100 11  
3030 8282  
LITHUANIA  
LUXEMBURG  
MALAYSIA  
MACEDONIA  
MEXICO  
8-800-77777  
INDIA  
1800 3000 8282  
1800 266 8282  
261 03 710  
1800-88-9999  
023 207 777  
0800-112-8888  
021-5699-7777  
INDONESIA  
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
0-800-614-40  
IRAN  
021-8255  
MOLDOVA  
MONGOLIA  
MONTENEGRO  
MOROCCO  
NAMIBIA  
ITALY  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
1-800-234-7267  
0120-327-527  
+7-800-555-55-55  
020 405 888  
JAMAICA  
JAPAN  
080 100 2255  
800-22273  
065777444  
JORDAN  
8197267864  
0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) www.samsung.com  
(€ 0,10/min)  
KAZAKHSTAN  
KENYA  
8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM:7799) www.samsung.com  
NETHERLANDS  
NEW ZEALAND  
0800 724 000  
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) www.samsung.com  
KOSOVO  
+381 0113216899  
315  
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
Country/Region  
Customer Care Center  
00-1800-5077267  
Web Site  
Country/Region  
Customer Care Center  
Web Site  
www.samsung.com/  
0 801-1 SAMSUNG (172-678)  
+48 22 607-93-33  
POLAND  
NICARAGUA  
www.samsung.com/  
PORTUGAL  
808 20-SAMSUNG (808 20 7267) www.samsung.com  
PUERTO RICO  
1-800-682-3180  
NIGERIA  
0800-726-7864  
08008 SAMSUNG (08008 726  
7864)  
NORWAY  
815 56480  
ROMANIA  
RUSSIA  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
www.samsung.com/ae  
TOLL FREE No.  
8-800-555-55-55  
9200-21230  
OMAN  
www.samsung.com/  
www.samsung.com/ae  
800-7267  
www.samsung.com/  
SAUDI ARABIA  
www.samsung.com/  
PANAMA  
PERU  
www.samsung.com/  
SENEGAL  
SERBIA  
800-00-0077  
0-800-777-08  
0700 SAMSUNG (0700 726 7864) www.samsung.com  
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com  
0800-SAMSUNG (0800-726-7864) www.samsung.com  
1-800-10-SAMSUNG(726-7864)  
for PLDT  
SINGAPORE  
SLOVAKIA  
SOUTH AFRICA  
SPAIN  
1-800-3-SAMSUNG(726-7864)for  
Digitel  
0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172 678)  
0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG)  
PHILIPPINES  
1-800-8-SAMSUNG(726-7864)for  
Globe  
SWEDEN  
02-5805777  
316  
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
Country/Region  
Customer Care Center  
Web Site  
Country/Region  
UZBEKISTAN  
VENEZUELA  
VIETNAM  
Customer Care Center  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
0-800-100-5303  
Web Site  
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF  
0.08/min)  
www.samsung.com/ch  
SWITZERLAND  
www.samsung.com/  
1 800 588 889  
ZAMBIA  
211350370  
TADJIKISTAN  
TAIWAN  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
0800-329-999  
0266-026-066  
TANZANIA  
THAILAND  
0685 88 99 00  
1800-29-3232  
02-689-3232  
TRINIDAD &  
TOBAGO  
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
TURKEY  
U.A.E  
444 77 11  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
0800-300 300  
UGANDA  
U.K  
0330 SAMSUNG (7267864)  
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
0-800-502-000  
U.S.A  
www.samsung.com/ua  
UKRAINE  
www.samsung.com/  
317  
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
Glossary  
ADF  
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by  
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as  
mentioned in this user’s guide.  
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically  
feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the  
paper at once.  
802.11  
AppleTalk  
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN)  
communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE  
802).  
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for  
computer networking. It was included in the original Mac (1984) and is now  
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.  
802.11b/g/n  
BIT Depth  
802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b  
supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150  
Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer interference from  
microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.  
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the  
color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader  
range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible  
colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly  
called as monochrome or black and white.  
Access point  
BMP  
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects  
wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks  
(WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals.  
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows  
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format  
on that platform.  
318  
Glossary  
 
Glossary  
BOOTP  
Coverage  
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP  
address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of  
computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign  
the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless  
workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced  
operating system.  
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For  
example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text  
on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the  
coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as  
the coverage.  
CSV  
CCD  
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange  
data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft  
Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the industry, even among  
non-Microsoft platforms.  
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD  
Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage  
when you move the machine.  
Collation  
DADF  
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is  
selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies.  
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that will  
automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine  
can scan on both sides of the paper.  
Control Panel  
Default  
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring  
instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine.  
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state,  
reset, or initialized.  
319  
Glossary  
Glossary  
DHCP  
DPI  
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking  
protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP  
client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to  
participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of  
IP addresses to client hosts.  
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and  
printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail  
in the image, and a larger file size.  
DRPD  
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company  
service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several  
different telephone numbers.  
DIMM  
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory.  
DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data.  
Duplex  
DLNA  
A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the  
machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with  
a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle.  
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on  
a home network to share information with each other across the network.  
DNS  
Duty Cycle  
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated  
with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet.  
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a  
month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year.  
The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the  
warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month  
assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.  
Dot Matrix Printer  
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that  
runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked  
cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.  
320  
Glossary  
Glossary  
ECM  
EtherTalk  
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1  
fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the  
fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise.  
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It  
was included in the original Mac (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor  
of TCP/IP networking.  
Emulation  
FDI  
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another.  
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a  
third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices  
allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.  
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so  
that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact  
reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which  
concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its  
internal state.  
FTP  
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files  
over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an  
intranet).  
Ethernet  
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area  
networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame  
formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the  
OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most  
widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present.  
Fuser Unit  
The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of  
a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the  
fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper  
permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer.  
321  
Glossary  
Glossary  
Gateway  
IEEE  
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network  
and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that  
allows access to another computer or network.  
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international  
non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology  
related to electricity.  
Grayscale  
IEEE 1284  
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color  
images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of  
gray.  
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and  
Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector  
type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example,  
a printer).  
Halftone  
Intranet  
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly  
colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a  
smaller number of dots.  
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and  
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an  
organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the  
term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.  
Mass storage device (HDD)  
Mass storage device (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is  
a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly  
rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.  
IP address  
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to  
identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet  
Protocol standard.  
322  
Glossary  
Glossary  
IPM  
ITU-T  
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM  
rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within  
one minute.  
The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization  
established to standardize and regulate international radio and  
telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the  
radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between  
different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates  
telecommunication.  
IPP  
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as  
well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used  
locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access  
control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and  
secure printing solution than older ones.  
ITU-T No. 1 chart  
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile  
transmissions.  
IPX/SPX  
JBIG  
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a  
networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and  
SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol  
having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was  
primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol  
for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).  
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with  
no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary  
images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images.  
JPEG  
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard  
method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for  
storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.  
ISO  
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international  
standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards  
bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.  
323  
Glossary  
Glossary  
LDAP  
MH  
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for  
querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP.  
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of  
data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the  
image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length  
encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes  
consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most  
faxes.  
LED  
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status  
of a machine.  
MMR  
MAC address  
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-  
T T.6.  
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a  
network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12  
hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address  
is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer,  
and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.  
Modem  
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also  
demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information.  
MFP  
MR  
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following  
functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a  
scanner and etc.  
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR  
encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first,  
the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and  
transmitted.  
324  
Glossary  
Glossary  
NetWare  
OSI  
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used  
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network  
protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare  
supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.  
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International  
Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a  
standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of  
complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers  
are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network,  
Data Link and Physical.  
OPC  
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for  
print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or  
rust colored and has a cylinder shape.  
PABX  
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone  
switching system within a private enterprise.  
An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage  
in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from  
contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper.  
PCL  
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL)  
developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard.  
Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying  
levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers.  
Originals  
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc,  
which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not  
itself copied or derived from something else.  
PDF  
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by  
Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device  
independent and resolution independent format.  
325  
Glossary  
Glossary  
PostScript  
Protocol  
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used  
primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an  
interpreter to generate an image.  
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,  
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.  
PS  
Printer Driver  
See PostScript.  
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the  
printer.  
PSTN  
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's  
public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is  
usually routed through the switchboard.  
Print Media  
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used  
in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.  
RADIUS  
PPM  
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote  
user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management  
of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA  
(authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network  
access.  
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast  
a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one  
minute.  
PRN file  
Resolution  
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device  
driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks.  
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi,  
the greater the resolution.  
326  
Glossary  
Glossary  
SMB  
TCP/IP  
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files,  
printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a  
network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication  
mechanism.  
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of  
communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the  
Internet and most commercial networks run.  
TCR  
SMTP  
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission  
such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can  
be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions.  
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions  
across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one  
or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is  
transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email  
message to the server.  
TIFF  
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image  
format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF  
images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that  
is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be  
used for pictures that have been made by various image processing  
applications.  
SSID  
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All  
wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with  
each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32  
characters.  
Toner Cartridge  
Subnet Mask  
A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains  
toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms  
the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be fused by by a  
combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in  
the paper.  
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine  
which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host  
address.  
327  
Glossary  
Glossary  
TWAIN  
Watermark  
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant  
scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within  
the program. It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac  
operating systems.  
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter  
when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna,  
Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and  
also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to  
discourage counterfeiting.  
UNC Path  
WEP  
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares  
in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is:  
\\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>  
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to  
provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security  
by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one  
end point to another.  
URL  
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and  
resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to  
use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the  
resource is located.  
WIA  
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally  
introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within  
these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner.  
USB  
WPA  
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB  
Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the  
parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB  
port to multiple peripherals.  
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi)  
computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of  
WEP.  
328  
Glossary  
Glossary  
WPA-PSK  
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or  
home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point  
(WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique  
key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more  
advanced security.  
WPS  
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home  
network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the  
wireless network connection easily without a computer.  
XPS  
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language  
(PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for portable document  
and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based  
specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based device-  
independent document format.  
329  
Glossary  
Index  
inside  
quick scanning  
scan  
A
outside  
accessing  
scan unit  
scanning  
management tools  
address book  
editing  
search  
cleaning a machine  
control panel  
convention  
copy  
general setup  
copying  
send fax  
SNS scanning  
SNS upload  
eco printing  
entering character  
error message  
group editing  
group registering  
registering  
using  
basic copying  
reducing or enlarging copies  
address book setup  
AirPrint  
F
AnyWeb Print  
D
favorites settings, for printing  
fax  
B
default settings  
tray setting  
adding documents to a reserved fax 243  
buttons  
eco  
automatic redialing  
E
canceling a reserved fax job  
changing the receive modes  
delaying a fax transmission  
id copy  
easy document creator  
configuration  
convert e-book  
device name  
numeric keypad  
print screen  
scan to  
forwarding a received fax to another  
destination  
wps  
forwarding a sent fax to another destination  
e-book conversion  
plug-in  
C
general setup  
quick scan  
cleaning  
Printing sent fax report automatically 248  
330  
Index  
Index  
receiving a fax in the computer  
receiving faxes in memory  
G
driver installation for USB cable connected  
general icons  
receiving in Answering Machine mode 246  
general settings  
glossary  
driver reinstallation for USB cable connected  
receiving in DRPD mode  
receiving in Fax mode  
printer properties  
printing  
google cloud printing  
receiving in secure mode  
receiving in Tel mode  
I
scanning  
receiving with ext. telephone  
redialing the last number  
sending a fax in the computer  
sending a priority fax  
unifled driver configurator  
using SetIP  
id copy  
installation  
accessories  
linux scanning  
loading  
paper in the tray1  
special media  
loading originals  
fax feature  
fax sending  
J
jam  
multi sending  
clearing original document  
clearing paper  
faxing  
adjusting darkness  
M
tips for avoiding paper jams  
adjusting resolution  
preparing to fax  
Mac  
L
common Mac problems  
receiving in Fax mode  
LCD display  
driver installation for network connected  
features  
browsing the machine status 196, 197, 199,  
machine features  
driver installation for USB cable connected  
print media feature  
Linux  
front view  
driver reinstallation for USB cable connected  
common Linux problems  
driver installation for network connected  
331  
Index  
Index  
printing  
wired network setup  
wireless network setup  
n-up printing  
labels  
scanning  
output support  
preprinted paper  
setting the paper size  
setting the paper type  
special media  
system requirements  
using SetIP  
Mac  
mac scanning  
O
machine information 196, 197, 199, 203, 208  
print menu  
output support  
overlay printing  
create  
machine setup  
print resolution set  
machine status  
maintenance parts  
menu overview  
Linux  
delete  
printer preferences  
print  
Linux  
multi-purpose tray  
using special media  
printer status  
P
general information  
N
placing a machine  
adjusting the altitude  
postScript driver  
troubleshooting  
preparing originals type  
print  
printing  
changing the default print settings  
network  
driver installation  
Linux  
Linux  
Mac  
multiple pages on one sheet of paper  
Mac  
Mac  
Windows  
general setup  
printing a document  
Windows  
general setup  
mobile OS  
installing environment  
introducing network programs  
IPv6 configuration  
printing on both sides of paper  
Mac  
mobileprint  
print media  
printing to a file  
SetIP program  
card stock  
332  
Index  
Index  
setting as a default machine  
special printer features  
USB memory  
resolution  
faxing  
service contact numbers  
SetIP program  
Special features  
specifications  
S
printing a document  
Linux  
safety  
print media  
information  
Mac  
status  
symbols  
printing feature  
problem  
operating system problems  
problems  
supplies  
samsung printer experience  
Samsung Printer Status  
scan  
available supplies  
estimated toner cartridge life  
monitoring the supplies life  
ordering  
general setup  
copying problems  
faxing problems  
paper feeding problems  
power problems  
printing problems  
printing quality problems  
scanning problems  
Scan Assitant  
scan feature  
replacing toner cartridge  
SyncThru Web Service  
general information  
SyncThru™ Web Service  
Scanning  
Scanning with Samsung Scan Assitant 235  
scanning  
T
basic information  
toner cartridge  
Linux scanning  
Mac scanning  
R
estimated life  
rear view  
Scanning from image editing program 234  
handling instructions  
non-Samsung and refilled  
redistributing toner  
replacing the cartridge  
storing  
regulatiory information  
reports  
Scanning from network connected machine  
Scanning using the WIA driver  
USB flash memory  
machine information 196, 199, 200, 201,  
333  
Index  
Index  
USB cable  
WPS  
tray  
Windows  
adjusting the width and length  
changing the tray size  
setting the paper size and type  
troubleshooting  
common Windows problems  
disconnectiong  
PBC mode  
driver installation for network connected  
driver installation for USB cable connected  
31,  
WPS (the machine does not have a display  
screen)  
driver installation for Windows 8 network  
U
PBC  
connected  
PIN  
understanding the status LED  
Unix  
system requirements  
USB cable  
driver installation for Windows 8 USB cable  
wireless network  
network cable  
connected  
driver installation for Windows 8 wireless  
network  
system requirements  
using SetIP  
driver installation  
driver reinstallation  
USB flash memory  
managing  
Windows 8  
driver uninstallation  
network  
printing  
driver installation  
USB cable  
scanning  
using help  
driver installation  
wireless  
W
driver installation  
watermark  
create  
wireless  
ad hoc mode  
delete  
Infrastructure mode  
edit  
334  
Index  

Lanier 5813 User Manual
Opticon Crd 9723 Crd 9723 User Manual
Powerex Mh C490f User Manual
Prima P170 User Manual
Sanyo N 1700sck User Manual
Smart Ups Apcrbc115 User Manual
Smc Networks Robo Cylinder Rgd4d User Manual
Worth Data Lz360 Usb User Manual
Xerox Workcentre 4260 Series User Manual
Xerox Workcentre 5755 User Manual